Home

R&S®FS-K10x(PC) LTE Measurement Software

1. eee eene nennen nnne nnn s 81 Spectrum Settings rere reris iiis sasuacsvesancten i intl Reiner Een 82 Configuring SEM and ACLR Measurements ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeseaeeeeeeeeeteeeesenes 82 Advanced Settings eese eiie iiiene trii tiet eiie EDAREN Eana 84 Controlling VO Data 84 Configuring the Baseband Input 85 Using Advanced Input Geitngs eene 86 Configuring the Digital 1 Q Input 86 Global Eur 87 Mapping Antenna Porte 88 Demod Ed La I 89 Configuring Downlink Signal Demodulation eee 89 Selecting the Demodulation Method nemen 89 Configuring Multicarrier Base Gtatons eee 90 Configuring Parameter Eetmatton sse ene 91 Compensating Signal ENOS ssnessen rsin a enne nnne nnns 91 Configuring EVM Measurements eene nnne 92 Processing Demodulated Data 93 Configuring MIMO TEE 94 Defining Downlink Signal Characteristics cc ccccseccsseeeeeeeceeeseeeeeeneeesseeeeeeeeeeeees 95 Defining the Physical Signal Characteristics sse 95 Configuring the Physical Layer Cell Identity 97 Configuring MIMO Measurements sse nemen nennen nnns 98 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Contents 5 2 4 Configuring PDSCH Gubtrames eee eeneeeeeeeieeeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeeee 99 5 3 Defining Advanced Signal Characteristics esee 105 5 3 1
2. 2 tette rer tarn ri ep Rae cr ap unen 190 V ee ee Me Ki Eu ee UE 191 GONFigure ACONfigsinstrument NCblariels 12 oett t ntn tr tarn tot rnnt eren 191 CONFIQUIEINOC Coie m 189 GONFigure POWer EXPected lOsinstrumente uccinaiete oni enata e rep xen ko Ta rebat XXE EL edge 184 GONFigure POWer EXPected RF instr rri amp rito is secet rrr etri rn e ra eren 184 CONFigure PRESet CONFig re LTE IT 150 CONFigure L TE DIE GONS LOCO nnise iga nn etna NOE E REA 150 CONFigureE NR E ee EE 216 GONFigure LTE DL CSIRS LEE 217 CONFigurel L TE DIE GSIRS OPDS Clits EE 217 CONFigureEETETEDEGSIRS POWASLE ccrto Ete trn rrr gru Ev pet rapa 217 GONFigure ETEEDECSIRS SGl ith heut ooo ugeet aec a San ere ci veut E Dru E 217 CONFigureEETETDEGSIRS STATO noire geed a snare 218 geleet RR ERT e ET 209 GONFigure E TEEDE EPDGCGh EOCalized ertt eiar alesis einen A EA ues 218 CONFigure LTE DL EPDCch NPRB CONFigure LTE DL EPDCch POWer GONFig ure rETEEDE EPDGchI RBASSIQI iiit rn ean hex teeth ehem Qr eec iba creek Lin ente e Pe eben 219 EI ee UI RR ERT GR RI 219 GONFigureELTEEDL MBSEFn AEID x E 224 CONFigure E TEEDEMBSEn3AENMEDL uri tr ra t dei oett Eege deSdel eeben nae 224 eer lee UI RR TER OR EE 224 CONFigure LTE DL MBSFn STATe CONFigure LTET DL MBSFn SUBFrame ssubframe PMCH MODoUulation eee 225 CO
3. 212 CONFigure L TE DL SUBFrame ssubframe ALLoc allocation PSOFfset 213 CONFigure L TE DL SUBFrame ssubframe ALLoc allocation RBCount 213 CONFigure L TE DL SUBFrame ssubframe ALLoc allocation2 RBOFfset 213 CONFigure LTE DL CSUBframes lt NofSubframes gt This command selects the number of configurable subframes in the downlink signal Parameters lt NofSubframes gt Range 0 to 39 RST 1 Example CONF DL CSUB 5 Sets the number of configurable subframes to 5 CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALCount lt NofAllocations gt This command defines the number of allocations in a downlink subframe Parameters lt NofAllocations gt lt numeric value gt RST 1 Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation Example CONF DL SUBF2 ALC 5 Defines 5 allocations for subframe 2 CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt GAP VRBGap This command turns the VRB Gap on and off Parameters lt VRBGap gt 0 Selects localized VRBs 1 Selects distributed VRBs and applies the first gap 2 Selects distributed VRBs and applies the second gap for chan nel bandwidths gt 50 resource blocks RST 0 Example CONF DL SUBF2 ALL5 GAP 0 Selects localized VRBs for allocation 5 in subframe 2 CONFigure LTE DL 5SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt UEID ID This command defin
4. M He 194 SENSeEPOWer SEM CEBS AMPBOWGt tenni tr rer nennen ete re tue arbe Re XE PER 198 SENSeEPOWer SEM CHBS AMPower AUTO incerti rather enitn rt nn re then Ra raped 194 SENSES iu e K 196 SENSe SWEep EGA Te AUTO D 195 EI ER ll e M duai 185 SENSEESY NG STATS X prerane eE a TN EEE A E EEE ETA 150 SENSe ETEFANT 6nd SEL ECh rniosan rr eren rene neret re i SENSe L TEEDE DEMOG AUT Q iioc o toe rtt erae t t entree eene rere eh rr ds SENSe LTE DL DEMod BESTimation SENSe L TE DL DEMod CBSCrambling E 203 SENSe L TEEDE DEMod CES Timation 2 eni rrr rrr tte rtr Ne i iiae re rrt 201 SENSe ETETFDE DEMod DAGElanriels ac coerente ep eue eh tene path EE eere nice 203 SENSe ETE DLDEMOJ le 202 SENSe L TEEDE DEMod MCFilter 1 rrr rer hn the hn er RR etr ren eerte ne nnne 201 SENSE LIEF DEDEM RRDA s ccrte terree o rv eI p URETRE XYe EY iy hp E E etps kn eO enr EE ATENTE 202 SENSe LTE DL FORMat PSCD SENSe E TEEDE TRACking PE IASe eire rri rn teh rhe ret eren ran SENSe ETETFBEP TRAGKIBO NL SENSe ETE e Oe d LE SENSe LTE FRAMe COUNt AUTO a SENSe EMEEFRAMG COUNES TAT Errena rN EE qoc ae Eee y ege a EE REESS SENSe ETE FRAME S COUN inanin i REENEN en SENSE E TET OOPOwer ATIMing 2i eor er ntn exu cadens trea trt re teer tr En creer d inu SENSe ETETF
5. Overall Frame Count Turns the manual selection of the number of frames to capture and analyze on and off If the overall frame count is active you can define a particular number of frames to capture and analyze The measurement runs until all required frames have been ana lyzed even if it takes more than one sweep The results are an average of the cap tured frames If the overall frame count is inactive the software analyzes all complete LTE frames currently in the capture buffer Remote command SENSe LTE FRAMe COUNt STATe on page 185 Number of Frames to Analyze Sets the number of frames that you want to capture and analyze If the number of frames you have set last longer than a single sweep the software con tinues the measurement until all frames have been captured The parameter is read only if e the overall frame count is inactive e the data is captured according to the standard Remote command SENSe LTE FRAMe COUNt on page 185 Auto According to Standard Turns automatic selection of the number of frames to capture and analyze on and off If active the software evaluates the number of frames as defined for EVM tests in the LTE standard If inactive you can set the number of frames you want to analyze This parameter is not available if the overall frame count is inactive Remote command SENSe LTE FRAMe COUNt AUTO on page 186 User Manual 1308 9029 4
6. 5 112 Power SPOCHUIN cer oon rre eret n ante 49 Power vs RB PDSCH 49 Power vs RB RS 390 Power vs symbol x carrier oo eee eee eee eeeeeeceeeeneeeneeees 38 PRB symbol offset carrcira 110 R Reference Level roisia reta crea E NEEF 71 Relative power P SYNC 106 Relative power reference signal 106 Relative power S SYNC essen 106 Resource BIOCKS rient Hie ih dence 95 Result Display Constellation Selection sesesssssss 53 Result SUMMAN trente rr rr 32 S Scrambling of coded bits Screen Layout E Selected Subframe sssssssssssssseeeenneees Setting P S SYNC Tx antenna sse 106 Settings PUNO MD RUPEE 98 Auto PDSCH Demod 89 Balanced 86 boosting estimation i Capture TME MR ES er Ho oc Cell Identity Group Channel Bandwidth cccccccccceessteeeeceeeessteeeeeeeesens 95 Channel Estimation sssssssseseene 91 Configurable Subframes sssssssssss 99 Conmig rajon TaDle asasinen en e NiET 99 Digital Input Data Rate assusta ec eeeeeneeeeeee 87 PMR Reno EA E cases eerheg iesen 86 Error iri Subftrame uiuere enn tht ree 99 EVM Calculation Method ccccccccceesssteeeeeeeeseeee 92 EXP AUG AE AAEE EA EREA E 72 Frequency 69 Full Scale Level 87
7. Error Vector Magnitude chapter 6 5 2 EVM results E TM3 1 RE power control dynamic range chapter 6 3 1 Power results Total power dynamic range Frequency error chapter 6 3 2 chapter 6 5 1 OSTP gt Result Summary Frequency Error gt Result Summary Error Vector Magnitude chapter 6 5 2 EVM results E TM3 2 RE power control dynamic range chapter 6 3 1 Power results Frequency error chapter 6 5 1 Frequency Error gt Result Summary Error Vector Magnitude chapter 6 5 2 EVM results E TM3 3 RE power control dynamic range chapter 6 3 1 Power results Frequency error chapter 6 5 1 Frequency Error gt Result Summary Error Vector Magnitude chapter 6 5 2 EVM results these measurements are available in the Spectrum application of the Rohde amp Schwarz signal and spec trum analyzers for example the R amp S FSW Configuring the Measurement 4 General Settings 4 1 4 1 1 The following chapter contains all settings that are available in the General Settings dialog box e Configuring the Measurement eene eerte nnne 68 e Configuring MIMO Measurement Getups ene 78 e Triggering Measurement nennen nnn einn nn nennen 81 Spectrum Settings E 82 e Advanced SINGS EE 84 Configuring the Measurement The general settings contain various settings that configure the general measurement setup You can find th
8. INPut lt n gt DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command defines the sampling rate for a digital UO signal source Parameters lt SampleRate gt RST 10 MHz Default unit Hz Example INP DIQ SRAT 10MHZ Defines a sampling rate of 10 MHz 9 7 5 5 Configuring Home Base Stations ISGENGel POWer GEM CHDBS AMbower nennen nent tn rtt rh rrr hh nnn nnns 198 SENSe POWer SEM CHBS AMPower Power This command defines the aggregated maximum power for home base stations or the TX power for medium range base stations In case of medium range base stations the command is available after SENSe POWer SEM CHBS AMPower AUTO has been turned off Parameters lt Power gt Numeric value Default unit dBm 9 7 5 6 9 8 9 8 1 Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation Example POW SEM CHBS AMP 0 Defines a power of 0 dBm Mapping Antenna Ports CONFigureE LTE DLE CC lt cc gt MIMO SUAR let ratas ee ENEE ce ae ema 199 CONFigure LTE DL CC lt cci gt MIMO SUAP lt Antenna gt This command selects the antenna port that should be measured on the first input channel Parameters lt Antenna gt AUTO Automatically assigns the antenna port AP715 AP816 AP917 AP1018 AP1119 AP1220 AP1321 AP1422 Assigns a specific antenna port to input channel 1 Example CONF DL MIMO SUAP AP715 Antenna port 7 15 is measured on input channel 1 Remote Command
9. cisco tor p a ene nete nin ert arn enne xe pepe 153 FETCRh SUMMary EVM DSQP AVERAage ini in er ecrit mex iter e oa Rd E ree ELA TEY SEE dE 153 FETCh SUMMary EVM DSSF MAXimUrri i cine tt nati ettet nic P nnne a ERE Rer E gan 153 FETCh SUMMary EVM DSSE MINIMUIN vi nre ttai e ttt nen erat n P n MR den 153 FETCh SUMMary EVM DSSF AVERage og FETCh SUMMary EVM DSS T MAXiImum eren eere repe nic rad ETET ei e raga FETCRh SUMMary EVM DSS T MINimutm nre ttai ttr rt nnn rhet Po n DR den 153 FEICh SUMMary EVM DSST AVERage ieniitn t rette rh iet xi er ctn tete Een E NUR 153 FETCh SUMMary EVM PGCHannel MAXImUm ucs iic oaa na ea rk t rh tnn tbt re nap kien Ra encre E hana 154 FETCRh SUMMary EVM PGCbHannelMINitmUm uti titio tp ntn e n etn en e dog 154 FETGCh SUMMary EVM PCHannel AVERAage init en kt oath n rot tbe ren bte E pascha 154 FETCh SUMMarty EVM PSIGnaEMINIiEDUETU irit irr tpi nr tree etr en e dg 154 FETGCh SUMMary EVM PSIGnalEAVERAge 2 otii rne kb oath ro be Fen bte E cerae ke geg 154 FETCh SUMMary EVMEALLEMA XImUm us inno nte i nasiti saan an Eir 152 FETCRh SUMMarty EVMEALLETEMINIIUETD aor rt pire enn ertet ene teta 152 FETGh SUMMary EVMEALLIAVERAge iiaca o tik eroe the mr obrem ore rr iei e xax 152 FETCh SUMMary FERRorMAXIITIUITI2 sssrini pieniin tnra ern oen t dan th i Ee Enea PE ERE HERR EEG 154 FETCh SUMMary FERRor MINimum S FETCh SUMMary FERRor AV
10. Q 41 EVM VS un MCN c 42 3 Buil DEEP 43 EVM VS SUDNI i t eter ottenere D Da da vet c bcc vtt dd d 43 Frequency Error vS SyMDOl EE 44 EVM vs Carrier Starts the EVM vs Carrier result display This result display shows the Error Vector Magnitude EVM of the subcarriers With the help of a marker you can use it as a debugging technique to identify any subcarri ers whose EVM is too high The results are based on an average EVM that is calculated over the resource ele ments for each subcarrier This average subcarrier EVM is determined for each ana lyzed subframe in the capture buffer If you analyze all subframes the result display contains three traces e Average EVM This trace shows the subcarrier EVM averaged over all subframes e Minimum EVM This trace shows the lowest average subcarrier EVM that has been found over the analyzed subframes e Maximum EVM This trace shows the highest average subcarrier EVM that has been found over the analyzed subframes R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays If you select and analyze one subframe only the result display contains one trace that shows the subcarrier EVM for that subframe only Average minimum and maximum values in that case are the same For more information see Subframe Selection on page 75 The x axis represents the center frequencies of the subcarriers On the y axis the EVM is plotted either in or in dB depending on the EVM Unit EVM
11. Fig 1 2 OFDM useful symbol generation using an IFFT The vector Sm is defined as the useful OFDM symbol It is the time superposition of the N narrowband modulated subcarriers Therefore from a parallel stream of N sources of data each one independently modulated a waveform composed of N orthogonal subcarriers is obtained with each subcarrier having the shape of a frequency sinc function see figure 1 1 figure 1 3 illustrates the mapping from a serial stream of QAM symbols to N parallel streams used as frequency domain bins for the IFFT The N point time domain blocks obtained from the IFFT are then serialized to create a time domain signal Not shown in figure 1 3 is the process of cyclic prefix insertion QAM symbol rate N T symbols sec QAM symbol OFDM Useful OFDM RE Fig 1 3 OFDM Signal Generation Chain In contrast to an OFDM transmission scheme OFDMA allows the access of multiple users on the available bandwidth Each user is assigned a specific time frequency resource As a fundamental principle of EUTRA the data channels are shared chan nels i e for each transmission time interval of 1 ms a new scheduling decision is taken regarding which users are assigned to which time frequency resources during this transmission time interval 1 2 2 OFDMA Parameterization A generic frame structure is defined for both EUTRA FDD and TDD modes Addition ally an alternative frame structure is defined for the TDD mode only
12. ID Symbol n Carrier 1 lt ID Symbol n Carrier n gt The allocation ID is encoded For the code assignment see chapter 9 6 1 30 Return Value Codes on page 170 The following parameters are supported e TRACE1 9 6 1 3 Allocation Summary For the Allocation Summary the command returns seven values for each line of the table lt subframe gt allocation ID number of RB relative power modulation absolute power lt EVM gt The unit for absolute power is always dBm The unit for relative power is always dB The unit for lt EVM gt depends on UNIT EVM All other values have no unit The allocation ID and modulation are encoded For the code assignment see chapter 9 6 1 30 Return Value Codes on page 170 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Remote Commands WEE Note that the data format of the return values is always ASCII Example Allocation Summary Selection Antenna 1 Sub Humber Rel Modulation Power per frame a of RB Power dB RE dBm 0 000 45 546 0 000 0 007 TRAC DATA TRACE1 would return 0 5 0 0 0000000000000 2 45 5463829153428 7 33728660354122E 05 0 3 0 0 0073997452251 6 42 5581007463452 2 54197349219455E 05 0 4 0 0 0052647197362 1 42 5464220485716 2 51485275782241E 05 9 6 1 4 Beamform Allocation Summary For the Beamform Allocation Summary result display the command returns four values for each all
13. If you are using beamforming you can also define the number of layers and code words see Spatial Multiplexing the scrambling identity and the single layer antenna port The mapping of antenna port to the physical antenna is fixed e Port 5 and 7 Antenna 1 e Port 8 Antenna 2 e Port 9 Antenna 3 e Port 10 Antenna 4 Beamforming Settings Scrambling Identity n_SCID 0 1 Single Layer Antenna Port E z The scrambling identity Nscip is available for antenna ports 7 and 8 It is used to initi alize the sequence that generates UE specific reference signals according to 36 211 section 6 10 3 1 The single layer antenna port selects the preconfigured antenna port in single layer beamforming scenarios Available if the codeword to layer mapping is 1 1 Remote command CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt PRECoding SCHeme on page 212 CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt PRECoding CLMapping on page 211 CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt PRECoding SCID on page 212 CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt PRECoding AP on page 211 5 3 5 3 1 Defining Advanced Signal Characteristics Carrier Aggregation Defines the PDSCH start offset for the selected PDSCH allocation in a system that uses carrier aggregation M Carrier A
14. Measuring Beamforming This chapter contains information on all measurements that show the quality of the beamforming For more information on beamforming phase measurements see chapter 8 5 Calibrat ing Beamforming Measurements on page 136 UE RS Weights Magnitude 60 UE RS Weights Pise tct ceret ott dtc ttc rte edt eh pr ttc tede 61 UE RS Weights Difference Pliase iie etate 62 UE RS Weights Difference Magnitude sse 62 Begmtorm Allocation Suite crt cett deett tc et o ceterae cte EE dece 63 Cell RS Weights Pliase 22 driver eed een erga tede ga paca 64 Cell RS Weights Difference Phase creer itenim hein nme nonna 64 Col RS Weights Magnitude EE 65 Golf WANE FIIasg 12 O tee oce emi 66 Beamionnihg EE DE 66 UE RS Weights Magnitude Starts the UE RS Weights Magnitude result display This result display shows the magnitude of the measured weights of the UE specific reference signal carriers You can use it to calculate the magnitude difference between different antenna ports The x axis represents the frequency with the unit depending on your selection The y axis shows the amplitude of each reference signal in dB The results correspond to the data of one subframe Thus the result display shows results if you have selected a particular subframe gt Subframe Selection You can select the antenna port to be measured via the Beamforming Selection soft
15. This chapter provides background information on the measurements and result dis plays available with the LTE Analysis Software e Symbols and Vartables ee 126 EE 127 e The LTE Downlink Analysis Measurement Applicatton reee 127 e MIMO Measurement Guide 130 e Calibrating Beamforming Measurements eeessseeieseeesen einen e 136 e Performing Time Alignment Measurements ennan 138 e Performing Transmit On Off Power Measurements esee 140 Symbols and Variables The following chapters use various symbols and variables in the equations that the measurements are based on The table below explains these symbols for a better understanding of the measurement principles aud data symbol actual decided Dik boosting factor Af Af Kaes carrier frequency offset between transmitter and receiver actual coarse estimate Afres residual carrier frequency offset C relative sampling frequency offset Hus H ik channel transfer function actual estimate i time index lcoarse Hine timing estimate coarse fine k subcarrier index OFDM symbol index Neer length of FFT Ng number of samples in cyclic prefix guard interval Ns number of Nyquist samples Noe number of resource elements n subchannel index subframe index Nik noise sample common phase error r i received sample in the time domain 8 2 8 3 1
16. on page 84 Gontrelling WO Dala ecn 196 e Configuring the Baseband Input esses eene 196 e Using Advanced Input Gettmngs nennen 197 e Configuring the Digital UO Input 198 e Configuring Home Base Giations esee enne 198 e IMapplrig Antenna FORES teer reperiet ttt ntl e ete rtr n He d d a e 199 Controlling UO Data SENSe SWAPiq ccce ttt ttt tette tete ttt toten LUI 196 NEE 196 SENSe SWAPiq State This command turns a swap of the and Q branches on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example SWAP ON Turns a swap of the and Q branches on INPut IQ FSOFfset Offset This command defines the location in an UO data file where the analysis starts Parameters lt Offset gt Time offset relative to the start offset of the I Q data Default unit S Example INP IQ FSOF 0 2 Defines an offset of 0 2 seconds Configuring the Baseband Input EI Le 196 Ee leren RN RE 197 SENSeENOLPASS STA KE 197 SENSe IQ DITHer STATe eccentric 197 INPut IQ IMPedance Impedance This command selects the input impedance for UO inputs 9 7 5 3 Remote Commands to Configure General Settings Parameters lt Impedance gt LOW HIGH RST LOW Example INP IQ IMP LOW Selects low input impedance for UO input INPut IQ BALanced STATe lt State gt This command selects if the UO inputs are symmet
17. EUTRA Test Model 3 3 E TM3 3 To select a test model for a different bandwidth replace 20MHz with either 1 4MHz 3MHz 5MHZ 10MHz or 15MHz Example MMEM LOAD TMOD DL E TM2 10MHz Selects test model 2 for a 10 MHz bandwidth Usage Setting only MMEMory STORe DEModsetting Path We Stores the current demodulation settings to a file The resulting file type is alloca tion Existing files will be overwritten Setting parameters lt Path gt String containing the path and name of the file Managing Files Example MMEM STOR DEM D USER Settingsfile allocation Usage Setting only MMEMory STORe IQ STATe Path This command saves UO data to a file Setting parameters Path String containing the path and name of the target file Example MMEM STOR IQ STAT C R_S Instr user data ig tar Saves UO data to the specified file Usage Setting only List of Commands SENSe FREQuency CEN Teil C CSC E 182 SENSE IO RR ECH E MT DEE 197 SENSe IQ EPASSE S TATe s cott tr hte tne rrr eren ern ree creen en 197 SENSe POWer ACHannelL AACbHAarinel 2 2 ainai th retineret ta E Fee beds 195 SENSeEPOWer AU TOSinstr metits E 197 SENSeJ POWer AUTO instrument STAT treten ttr erronee 183 SENSeEPOWer NGORTGCHORL nero enr e re bath enhn a ERR LE RET EXER ERR RR FREE ER ERES LR eR aea dn 195 SENSE r POWer SEM CGA Ne p
18. T dl CS ei RK AIP E T 9 pe emt me emt a ed E E e H 11 As w T er EE F e Ee gen L am E i E E E E s XL Ak 1 5 E L IS TF aw eee e RIESS nam ff ef 12 4 oa ae da a2 H as b as 1 2 Beta Fig 8 3 Constellation diagram E dp ente t i Md eben en i t AV 4 w m A w i 1 H 1 m n Lj Ki adie EJ wm no wm 19 w Fig 8 4 EVM vs OFDM symbol number MIMO Measurement Guide Measurements with the R amp S FS Z11 trigger unit The trigger unit R amp S FS Z11 is a device that makes sure that the measurement starts on all analyzers master and slaves at the same time Connecting the trigger unit gt Connect the NOISE SOURCE output of the master analyzer to the NOISE SOURCE CONTROL input of the trigger unit gt Connect the EXT TRIG inputs of all analyzers master and slaves to the TRIG OUT 1 to 4 or 1 and 2 in case of measurements on two antennas of the trigger unit The order is irrelevant that means it would be no problem if you connect the master analyzer to the TRIG OUT 2 of the trigger unit With this setup all analyzers including the master analyzer are triggered by the trigger unit The trigger unit also has a TRIG INPUT connector that you can connect an external trigger to If you are using an external trigger the external trigger supplies the trigger event If not the analyzer noise source control supplies the trigger event Note that if you do not use an external trigger the TRI
19. 2 1 Licensing the Software Welcome The EUTRA LTE measurement software makes use of the UO capture functionality of the following spectrum and signal analyzers to enable EUTRA LTE TX measurements conforming to the EUTRA specification e R amp S FSQ e R amp S FSG e R amp S FSV e R amp S FSVR e R amp S FSW e R amp S RTO This manual contains all information necessary to configure perform and analyze such measurements LICENSING Rue EE 16 e Installing the Goftware AAA 19 e Connecting the Computer to an Anahyzer enne 19 e Application e EE 25 Configuring the SOTEIWAaFO 2 eere tente teinte etn ee tie aeta agua RIS FR MERE AR danas 28 Licensing the Software The software provides the following general functionality e To capture and analyze UO data from an R amp S amp FSW R amp SGFSV R amp S FSVR R amp SGFSQ R amp SGFSG or R amp S RTO e To read and analyze l Q data from a file License type You can purchase two different license types for the software e R amp SGFS K10xPC This license supports software operation with and without an R amp S instrument ana lyzer or oscilloscope The software works with a connection to an analyzer but also supports the analysis of data stored in a file This license type requires a smartcard reader dongle e R amp SGFSV FSQ K10x This license requires a connection to an R amp S FSV R amp S FSVR R amp SFSQ or R amp S FSG The license must be installed on the anal
20. 60 70 80 90 100 110 Symbol Number Remote command Selecting the result display CALCulate lt n gt FEED SPEC PVSC Querying results TRACe DATA Time Alignment Error Starts the Time Alignment Error result display The time alignment is an indicator of how well the transmission antennas in a MIMO system are synchronized The Time Alignment Error is the time delay between a refer ence antenna for example antenna 1 and another antenna For more information see chapter 8 6 Performing Time Alignment Measurements on page 138 The software shows the results in a table Each row in the table represents one antenna The reference antenna is not shown For each antenna the maximum minimum and average time delay that has been mea sured is shown The minimum and maximum results are calculated only if the mea surement covers more than one frame If you perform the measurement on a system with carrier aggregation each row repre sents one antenna The number of lines increases because of multiple carriers The reference antenna of the main component carrier CC1 is not shown In case of carrier aggregation the result display also evaluates the frequency error of the component carrier CC2 relative to the main component carrier CC1 In any case results are only displayed if the transmission power of both antennas is within 15 dB of each other Likewise if only one antenna transmits a signal results will not be displayed for exam
21. Demodulation Settings dialog box Downlink Demodulation Settings Downlink Signal Characteristics Downlink Advanced Signal Characteristics Parameter Estimation Boosting Estimation r Channel Estimation EVM 3GPP Definition l Boosting sitzt natio T 91 Channel ESMAO M ERR acacia daceclsasnts A A EAA A O E 91 Boosting Estimation Turns boosting estimation on and off When you turn this eature on the software automatically sets the relative power set tings of all physical channels and the P S SYNC by analyzing the signal Remote command SENSe LTE DL DEMod BESTimation on page 201 Channel Estimation Selects the method of channel estimation e EVM 3GPP Definition Channel estimation according to 3GPP TS 36 141 This method is based on aver aging in frequency direction and linear interpolation Examines the reference signal only e Optimal Pilot only Optimal channel estimation method Examines the reference signal only e Optimal Pilot and Payload Optimal channel estimation method Examines both the reference signal and the payload resource elements Remote command SENSe LTE DL DEMod CESTimation on page 201 Compensating Signal Errors The tracking settings contain settings that compensate for various common signal errors that may occur The tracking settings are part of the Downlink Demodulation Settings tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box Configuring D
22. FETCh SUMMary GIMBalance MINimum FETCh SUMMary GIMBalance AVERage This command queries the UO gain imbalance Return values lt Gainlmbalance gt lt numeric value gt Minimum maximum or average UO imbalance depending on the last command syntax element Default unit dB Example FETC SUMM GIMB Returns the current gain imbalance in dB Usage Query only FETCh SUMMary IQOFfset MAXimum FETCh SUMMary IQOFfset MINimum FETCh SUMMary IQOFfset AVERage This command queries the UO offset Return values lt lQOffset gt lt numeric value gt Minimum maximum or average UO offset depending on the last command syntax element Default unit dB Example FETC SUMM IQOF Returns the current IQ offset in dB Usage Query only FETCh SUMMary OSTP MAXimum FETCh SUMMary OSTP MINimum FETCh SUMMary OSTP AVERage This command queries the OSTP Return values lt OSTP gt lt numeric value gt Minimum maximum or average OSTP depending on the last command syntax element Default unit dBm Example FETC SUMM OSTP Returns the current average OSTP value Usage Query only Remote Commands to Read Numeric Results FETCh SUMMary POWer MAXimum FETCh SUMMary POWer MINimum FETCh SUMMary POWer AVERage This command queries the total power Return values lt Power gt lt numeric value gt Minimum maximum or average power depending on the last command syntax element Default unit
23. LTE DL DEMod DACHannels on page 203 Configuring MIMO Setups The MIMO settings contain settings that configure MIMO measurement setups The MIMO settings are part of the Downlink Demodulation Settings tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box Downlink Demodulation Settings Downlink Signal Characteristics Downlink Advanced Signal Characteristics MIMO Compensate Crosstalk Li vM epe Compensate UE 95 5 2 5 2 1 Defining Downlink Signal Characteristics Compensate Crosstalk Turns compensation of crosstalk produced by one of the components in the test setup on and off Turn this feature on if you expect crosstalk from the DUT or another component in the test setup This may be necessary for example for over the air measurements If you connect the DUT to the analyzer by cable turn off crosstalk compensation In that case the only crosstalk results from the DUT itself and contributes as distortion to the measurement results Remote command CONFigure LTE DL MIMO CROSstalk on page 203 Defining Downlink Signal Characteristics The downlink signal characteristics contain settings to describe the physical attributes and structure of a downlink LTE signal You can find the signal characteristics in the Demod Settings dialog box For more information on the MIMO Configuration see MIMO Configuration on page 79 e Defining the Physical Signal Characteristics A 95 e Configuring th
24. Note that after calibration is done you must not change several parameters see below Setting up the measurement equipment Now that the generator and software are configured properly feed the signal into the oscilloscope through an RF splitter If you are using a 4 way RF splitter with four data streams calibration can be done in one go If you are using a 2 way splitter with four data streams you have to calibrate each input channel and cable separately gt start the calibration select the splitter type from the dialog box and follow the instructions Optionally you can connect an attenuator to each oscilloscope channel and thus improve matching impedance Generating new calibration data gt Start the calibration with the Generate Calibration Data softkey The software performs a single measurement to calculate the correction values Note If you are using a 2 way splitter calibration consists of several measure ments one for each antenna After each measurement you have to connect the signal to a different input channel After the calibration measurement is done you can save the calibration file This can be useful if you want to use the same equipment again later on The calibration file has the extension ca1 It contains the following parameters that will be restored if you use the calibration file again e Center frequency e Reference level during calibration e MIMO configuration number of antennas and number
25. OFDM has several benefits including its robustness against multipath fading and its efficient receiver architecture figure 1 1 shows a representation of an OFDM signal taken from 3GPP TR 25 892 2 In this figure a signal with 5 MHz bandwidth is shown but the principle is of course the same for the other EUTRA bandwidths Data symbols are independently modulated and transmitted over a high number of closely spaced orthogonal subcarriers In EUTRA downlink modulation schemes QPSK 16QAM and 64QAM are available In the time domain a guard interval may be added to each symbol to combat inter OFDM symbol interference due to channel delay spread In EUTRA the guard interval is a cyclic prefix which is inserted prior to each OFDM symbol 5 MHz Bandwidth ger Kn KA Frequency kk M M KK KM Time Fig 1 1 Frequency Time Representation of an OFDM Signal In practice the OFDM signal can be generated using the inverse fast Fourier transform IFFT digital signal processing The IFFT converts a number N of complex data sym bols used as frequency domain bins into the time domain signal Such an N point IFFT is illustrated in figure 1 2 where a mN n refers to the n subchannel modulated data symbol during the time period mT lt t m 1 T Long Term Evolution Downlink Transmission Scheme mT m 1 time a mN 0 mt m 1 T a mN 1 time a mN 2 gt s 0 s 1 542 Sm N 1 Sm frequency
26. Power vs Symbol x Carrier Constellation Diagram Allocation Summary Bit Stream and Time Alignment If All is selected either the results from all subframes are displayed at once or a sta tistic is calculated over all analyzed subframes Selecting All either displays the results over all subframes or calculates a statistic over all subframes that have been analyzed User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 75 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC General Settings eee SESE SEE EE EEE EEE EEE EEE Ee SSS Example Subframe selection If you select all subframes All the software shows three traces One trace shows the subframe with the minimum level characteristics the second trace shows the sub frame with the maximum level characteristics and the third subframe shows the aver aged level characteristics of all subframes e PK peak value e AV average value e MI minimum value If you select a specific subframe the software shows one trace This trace contains the results for that subframe only Remote command SENSe LTE SUBFrame SELect on page 188 Antenna Selection Selects the antenna you want to display the results for For more information see MIMO Configuration on page 79 Remote command SENSe LTE ANTenna SELect on page 187 SENSe LTE SOURce SELect on page 188 Configuring Time Alignment Measurements The Time Alignment measurement settings contain settings that defin
27. SCPI command CONFigure ACONfig lt instrument gt NCHannels on page 191 Analyzer Input Channel Assigns one of the UO data streams input channel to a particular oscilloscope chan nel The Analyzer Input Channel has no effect if you use only instruments that have a sin gle input channel SCPI command CONFigure ACONfig instrument ICSequence on page 191 Instrument Connection Configuration The Instrument Connection Configuration dialog box contains functionality that is necessary to successfully establish a connection in a network of analyzers The dialog box contains several elements Interface Type Number IP Address or Computer Name Subsystem LAN vod 11 D o D LOCALHOST INSTR VISA RSC TCPIP LOCALHOST Test Connection coe Interface Type Selects the type of interface you want to use You have to connect the analyzer or oscilloscope via LAN interface or the IEEE bus GPIB Number Selects the number of the interface if the PC has more than one interfaces e g sev eral LAN cards Address Defines the address of the instrument The type of content depends on the interface type e GPIB Address Primary GPIB address of the analyzer Possible values are in the range from 0 to 31 The default GPIB address for an R amp S instruments is 20 Available for IEEE bus systems using the IEEE 488 protocol The interface type is GPIB e P Address or Computer Name Name or host address TCP IP of th
28. The software supports limit defintions for the following types of base stations e Wide areas base stations Category A and B e Local Area base stations e Home base stations e Medium Range base stations Category A and B are defined in ITU R recommendation SM 329 For Category B operating band unwanted emissions there are two options for the limits that may be applied regionally Opt1 and Opt2 The type and category you should use for the measurement depends on the category and option that the base station you are testing supports For Home Area base stations you can define an additional Aggregated Maximum Power Of All TX Ports P for all antenna ports of a home area base station The aggregated maximum power is the aggregated power of all antenna ports and has an effect on the shape of the SEM For Medium Range base station you can automatically measure or manually enter the power of the carrier TX Power Remote command SENSe POWer SEM CATegory on page 194 Home BS power SENSe POWer SEM CHBS AMPower on page 198 Medium BS power mode SENSe POWer SEM CHBS AMPower AUTO on page 194 Medium BS power value SENSe POWer SEM CHBS AMPower on page 198 Aggregated Maximum Power Of AII TX Ports P Defines the aggregated maximum power of all TX ports of home base stations The aggregate maximum power is required to calculate limit line values for SEM measure ments on home base stations The
29. The unit is always dBm e TRACE2 Returns the power for the transient regions lt absolute power gt The unit is always dBm e LIST Returns the contents of the On Off Power table For each line it returns seven val ues lt off period start limit gt lt off period stop limit gt lt time at delta to limit gt lt absolute off power gt lt distance to limit gt lt falling transient period gt lt rising transient period gt The unit for the lt absolute off power gt is dBm The unit for the lt distance to limit is dB All other values have the unit s Power Spectrum For the Power Spectrum result display the command returns one value for each trace point lt power gt The unit is always dBm Hz The following parameters are supported e TRACE1 Power vs RB RS For the Power vs RB RS result display the command returns one value for each resource block of the reference signal that has been analyzed lt absolute power gt The unit is always dBm The following parameters are supported e TRACE1 Returns the average power over all subframes e TRACE2 Remote Commands to Read Trace Data Returns the minimum power found over all subframes If you are analyzing a partic ular subframe it returns nothing TRACE3 Returns the maximum power found over all subframes If you are analyzing a par ticular subframe it returns nothing 9 6 1 25 Power vs RB PDSCH 9 6 1 26 9 6 1 27 For the
30. block SFO compensation can optionally be enabled of the reference path The coarse estimation block uses the reference signal symbols to determine estimates of the chan nel transfer function by interpolation in both time and frequency direction A special channel estimation CTT as defined in 3GPP TS 36 211 is additionally generated The coarse estimation results are used to equalize the samples of the reference path prior to symbol decision Based on the decided data symbols a fine channel estimation is optimally performed and then used to equalize the partially compensated samples of the measurement path 8 3 3 Analysis The analysis block of the EUTRA LTE downlink measurement application allows to compute a variety of measurement variables EVM The error vector magnitude EVM measurement results EVM PDSCH QPSK 16 QAM 64 QAM are calculated according to the specification in 3GPP TS 36 211 All other EVM measurement results are calculated according to Mile ai EVM 8 2 on subcarrier k at OFDM symbol I where b is the boosting factor Since the average power of all possible constellations is 1 when no boosting is applied the equation can be rewritten as m E a EVM Lk 8 3 The average EVM of all data subcarriers is then MIMO Measurement Guide EVM gata 2 2E VM Fk N REdata l kata 8 4 The number of resource elements taken into account is denoted by Npe aata UO imbalance The I Q
31. lt Phase gt The unit degrees The following parameters are supported e TRACE1 Returns the phase of the measured weights of the reference signal RS carriers over one subframe EVM vs Carrier For the EVM vs Carrier result display the command returns one value for each subcar rier that has been analyzed lt EVM gt The unit depends on UNIT EVM The following parameters are supported e TRACE1 Returns the average EVM over all subframes e TRACE2 Returns the minimum EVM found over all subframes If you are analyzing a particu lar subframe it returns nothing e TRACE3 Returns the maximum EVM found over all subframes If you are analyzing a partic ular subframe it returns nothing EVM vs RB For the EVM vs RB result display the command returns one value for each resource block that has been analyzed lt EVM gt The unit depends on UNIT EVM The following parameters are supported e TRACE1 Returns the average power for each resource block over all subframes e TRACE2 Returns the minimum power found over all subframes If you are analyzing a partic ular subframe it returns nothing e TRACE3 Returns the maximum power found over all subframes If you are analyzing a par ticular subframe it returns nothing 9 6 1 18 9 6 1 19 9 6 1 20 9 6 1 21 Remote Commands to Read Trace Data EVM vs Subframe For the EVM vs Subframe result display the command returns one value for each su
32. parameter TRACE1 Returns one value for each trace point of trace 1 yellow Trace 1 contains the absolute power values measured with a 1 MHz RBW absolute power The unit is always dBm Remote Commands to Read Trace Data e TRACE2 Returns one value for each trace point of trace 2 green Trace 2 contains the absolute power values measured with a 100 kHz RBW TRACE2 is available for relative ACLR measurements e LIST Returns the contents of the ACLR table For each channel it returns six values bandwidth spacing offset power delta to limit frequency at delta to limit limit check result The channel order is TX channel gt lower adjacent gt upper adjacent gt lower alternate upper alternate The unit of the bandwidth spacing offset and frequency at delta to limit is Hz The unit of the power is either dBc or dBm depending on the ACLR measurement mode relative or absolute The limit check result is either a 0 for PASS or a 1 for FAIL Note that the TX channel does not have a spacing offset delta to limit frequency at delta to limit and limit check result NaN is returned instead 9 6 1 2 Allocation ID vs Symbol x Carrier For the Allocation ID vs Symbol x Carrier the command returns one value for each resource element ID Symbol 0 Carrier 1 ID Symbol 0 Carrier n ID Symbol 1 Carrier 1 ID Symbol 1 Carrier n
33. 6 1 5 3 6 2 Defining Advanced Signal Characteristics Downlink Demodulation Settings Downlink Signal Characteristics Downlink Advanced Signal Characteristics M Control Channels PRB Symbol Offset Control Region Auto PCFICH D for PDCCH PBCH Present r PBCH Rel Power 5 533 dB PCFICH Present Iw PCFICH Rel Power 5 280 dB PHICH Duration Noma PHICH N_g 1 6 sl PHICH Number of Groups 0 PHICH Rel Power 2000 PDCCH Format 3 Auto sl Number of PDCCHs 8 PDCCH Rel Power 1200048 EPDCCH PRB Pais Disabled v EPDCCH Set ID 0 EPDCCHRel Power mp EPDCCH RB Assign 0 EPDCCH Localized v e Configuring the PBOH iiir nd a e e rodea rein redo 111 Configuring the PGFIGH ii et me e dee ea e SEN 111 e Configuring the PHIGEL iiid rnnt trn th battre chi tarn dt n EENS 112 e Configuring the PDOGE iei ee ettet t t t Dea tatur e Yd s 113 e Configuring the EPDGOGPEL ertt eee hee ie RR Y HR RR RAS 114 Configuring the PBCH The physical broadcast channel PBCH carries system information for the user equip ment You can include or exclude the PBCH in the test setup and define the relative power of this channel PBOB WS EE 111 PBCH Relative EE 111 PBCH Present Includes or excludes the PBCH from the test setup Remote command CONFigure LTE DL PBCH STAT on page 219 PBCH Relative Power Defines the power of the PBCH relative to the reference signal Remote command CONFigu
34. AP1220 antenna ports 12 20 AP1321 antenna ports 13 21 AP1422 antenna ports 14 22 Example CONF DL BF AP AP816 Selects antenna ports 8 and 16 9 5 Remote Commands to Read Numeric Results FETCh SUMMany CRESEMAXIMUM as nace te eee ae atre ota e remet nete 152 FETCH SUMMary CRESEM INIR 2 oir uoo a dead eto cua x d co digan a eoe eoe e d e 152 ai leie d Eeer E E KEE 152 FETCH SUMMaryEVMIEAEL MAXIRIDETIGE edd ett coa tee eae ttt erret tentes 152 FETCh SUMMary EVM AELEMINImUI 7 2 2 7 rro ace dua cocco racione 152 FEICh SUMMary EVMEAELIEAVERage 2 areae rn eerte RE en urne 152 FETCh SUMMary EVM DSQP MAXiIMUM nene hehehe enne n ener nnns 153 EEGENEN Heed 153 FErICh SSUMMary EVMDSOP AVERage 2 ieri recited Leu p vL aa cr pna ada 153 FETCh SUMMary EVMIDSST MANXIIIMITID etian ici NEEN SEENEN ae 153 FETCHSUMMary EVM DSST MINIMUM esanian aana aenda rne de cue eere eene 153 FEICh SUMMary EVM DSST AVERage 2 2 2 1 preteen tite EA d ceu aaa 153 FETChH SUMMary EVM DSSF MAXIMUIN 21 cca ecu rated nnd take dnt n e ERR See 153 FE TCh SUMMarv EVM DSGE MiNImum nennen neniani enne 153 FETCH SUMMaryiEVIM DSSF AVERAGE eroici aroia iderana aA coeant 153 FETCh SUMMary EVM PCHannel MAXImUm iieri ooo tte erat cedeessneeedcateiaeanevoasesencde 154 FETCh SUMMary EVM PCHannel MINimum eese esent 154 FETCh SUMMary EVM PCHannel AVERage eeeee
35. Carrier 2 aterert e eR etn 160 Allocation SUIT maly occae cog dts ce Vp etre cn Eyre pora e EE Ere oe rude 160 Beamform Allocation Summary secet citra eese ates eL ak EHE ka eruca 161 jc EE 161 eas 162 EE oa m 162 Cell RS Weights Phase Difference cerneret ecran 162 Channel Decoder Resllls 2 rti acere ie aote ges 163 Channel and Spectrum Flatness nnn 164 Channel and Spectrum Flatness Ditterence rnnr nnne 164 Channel Group Delay rere ete a tre cete at eo e de tc d REX ES 164 ENEE Tel BI Te 021 oe 165 Cal RS Weights Magnitudo a er ez tree ne t y eicere ned 165 CSI RS Ee ue 166 EVI YS CIMOn Ee EE AO 166 EVM CI Cc 166 Le E 167 EVI Buca Mec aaatienal AO 167 EVM vs Symbol x Galtler cercate ttn not Rhet nr ebd dde nd 167 Erequency Enor we SyItibol cete te nave ie tee e eet ree t Eg re 167 iE do 168 Ewe Spect e EERSTEN EENEG 168 Power vs RB RS t AEEe 168 Power vs RB RE EE 169 Power vs oytibol e ate mre reta de Y Herd 169 Spectrum Emission Mask 169 UE RS Weights Magnitude Difference ceeded ween aed 170 UE RS Weights Phase Difference 2 eo irme i natisieieierd eerie 170 RUM e 170 Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio For the ACLR result display the number and type of returns values depend on the
36. Cell RS Weights Phase 64 channel decoder results 4 058 channel flatniess rtr 50 channel flatness difference sessssss 51 channel flatness grdel afoul constellation ne 21 52 CSI RS Weights Magnitude 4 05 CSI RS Weights Phase 66 EVM error vector magnitude w 40 EVM VS CalTIBr aseli sriti sanii t eres 40 EVM VSRB iine cine iret deed 43 EVM vs subframe s 43 EVM vs sym x carr 42 EVM vs symbol 41 freq err vs symbol 44 ek ccs nee 82 MISE TE 54 UI 32 on off power 236 power spectrum we A8 power vs RB PDSCH 49 power vs RB RS n00 power vs sym X Carr 5238 PVT power over time eeeeeeene 34 leide EE 32 signal flow m Te NEE el Hun 45 StatiStiGS irtera 54 UE Specific RS Weights Magnitude 60 UE Specific RS Weights Phase 3 401 UE Specific RS Weights Difference Magnitude 62 UE Specific RS Weights Difference Phase 62 Multicarrier fillr rrr ette 90 N N rmber or RB sui i rci he ca e e EP e e Ea ose Numerical results O EROEM e EE 36 P PZS SYNG Tx antenna rentrer eere 106 P SYNC Relative Power 106 PBGH E 2414 PGFEIGELD xk i encocnniet 2 111 PDSCH reference data ins 93 PDSCH subframe detection A 90 Phase EITOF 5 tnr e ete etre ein e veo dt 92 PHICH
37. DL PRSS STAT ON Turns the positioning reference signal on CONFigure LTE DL PRSS BW lt Bandwidth gt This command defines the bandwidth of the positioning reference signal Parameters lt Bandwidth gt BW1_40 BW3_00 BW5_00 BW10_00 BW15 _00 BW20 00 RST BW1 40 Default unit MHz Example CONF DL PRSS BW BW5 00 Defines a 5 MHz bandwidth for the positiong reference signal CONFigure L TE DL PRSS CI lt PRSConfiguration gt This command selects the configuration index of the Positioning Reference Signal Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation Parameters lt PRSConfiguration gt Number of the configuration index Example CONF DL PRSS CI 2 Selects configuration index 2 for the positioning reference signal CONFigure LTE DL PRSS NPRS lt NofDLSubframes gt This command defines the number of subframes the Positioning Reference Signal occupies Parameters lt NofDLSubframes gt 1 2 4 6 Example CONF DL PRSS NPRS 1 Defines 1 subframe for the poitioning reference signal CONFigure LTE DL PRSS POWer lt Power gt This command defines the relative power of the Positioning Reference Signal Parameters lt Power gt Default unit dB Example CONF DL PRSS POW 1 Defines a relative power of 1 dB for the positioning reference signal CONFigure LTE DL SFNO lt Offset gt This command defines th
38. Data Instead of capturing data directly through hardware components you can also analyze data that has been recorded previously and saved in a file On the same lines it is also possible to save the data that has been captured with an analyzer for further analysis at a later time or for documentation You can store and load UO data in binary or ASCII format For a correct display of the power the I Q data has to be scaled linearily in Volt e g for the Capture Buffer result display Loading UO data Load the contents of an UO data file into the software fast and easy by dragging and dropping the file somwhere into the user interface The software updates the UO data to be measured automatically All functionality to import and export data is in the File menu or file manager that you can access via the FILE key ASCII format dat format In case of the ASCII dat format the data is expected as and Q values in alternating rows value 1 Q value 1 value 2 gt Q value 2 To be able to analyze previously recorded data you have to set the input source to File When you start a measurement the software will ask you to select a file that contains the data To save data enter the file manager and save the data with Save IQ Data Binary format iqw format In case of the binary iqw format the data is expected in 32 bit floating point format This format is also known as Little Endian LSB
39. EVM eee 40 3 4 Measuring the Spectrum eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennn nnne ANANE EEANN aE Naana 45 3 4 1 Frequency Sweep Measurement sss eene nne 45 3 4 2 VQ EE EE 49 3 5 Measuring the Symbol Constellation eene 52 3 0 Measuring Statistlcs coii ieeeeneaiie en nuin nne emassa nn NEREAK nair 54 3 7 Measuring Beamforming inerenti innen inia ka ausa tem u aa paa nE a RR ipa pneu nis 60 3 8 3GPP Test Scenar os eiie reni te tasti neas b oa po ATEENAN NESANS 66 4 1 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 1 3 4 1 4 4 1 5 4 1 6 4 1 7 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 4 1 4 5 4 5 1 4 5 2 4 5 3 4 5 4 4 5 5 4 5 6 5 1 5 1 1 5 12 5 1 3 5 1 4 5 1 5 5 1 6 5 1 7 5 2 5 2 1 5 22 5 2 3 General Setting Me EN 68 Configuring the Measurement eese nennen nnne nennen 68 Defining General Signal Characteristics cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeseaeeeseeees 68 Configuring the Input 69 Configuring the Input Level eesriie aiaeei a EEEa EEA 70 Configuring the Data Capture naaa 72 Configuring Measurement Results eee enne eee eeeetieeeeeeeneeeeeeenaeeeeeetnieeeeeeennas 74 Configuring Time Alignment Measurements sss 76 Configuring Transmit On Off Power Measurements 77 Configuring MIMO Measurement Setups eene nnns 78 Triggering Measurements
40. Input Source ir LC 183 SENSe INPut lt Source gt This command selects the signal source Parameters lt Source gt RF Select radio frequency input as signal source AIQ Select analog UO input baseband as signal source DIQ Select digital UO input as signal source Example INP DIQ Select digital UO as signal source 9 7 1 3 Configuring the Input Level ISENZGel POWer AUlTO AnstrumentztSTATel eene nennen nnne nnne 183 CONFigure POWer EXPected RF Anstrumentz neret ennt 184 CONFloure POWer ENbeched IO cJnstrumentz eene nennen 184 INPutsn AT Tenuation lt imStrume nt icc icecescectcc aa Ea a aaa i aaRS 184 DISPlay WINDow n TRACe t Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet ueeeesesessesss 185 SENSe POWer AUTO lt instrument gt STATe State This command initiates a measurement that determines the ideal reference level Remote Commands to Configure General Settings Parameters lt State gt OFF Performs no automatic reference level detection ON Performs an automatic reference level detection before each measurement ONCE Performs an automatic reference level once RST ON Example POW AUTO2 ON Activate auto level for analyzer number 2 CONFigure POWer EXPected RF lt instrument gt lt RefLevel gt This command defines the reference level when the input source is RF Parameters lt RefLevel gt RST 30 dBm Default unit DBM Example CONF POW EXP RF3 20 Sets the radio
41. LTE mode including the bandwidth in the header table SE Remote command CONFigure LTE DL CC cci BW on page 204 Cyclic Prefix The cyclic prefix serves as a guard interval between OFDM symbols to avoid interfer ences The standard specifies two cyclic prefix modes with a different length each The cyclic prefix mode defines the number of OFDM symbols in a slot e Normal A slot contains 7 OFDM symbols e Extended A slot contains 6 OFDM symbols The extended cyclic prefix is able to cover larger cell sizes with higher delay spread of the radio channel e Auto The application automatically detects the cyclic prefix mode in use The software shows the currently selected cyclic prefix in the header table BILE SLE Remote command CONFigure LTE DL CC cci CYCPrefix on page 204 Configuring TDD Frames TDD frames contain both uplink and downlink information separated in time with every subframe being responsible for either uplink or downlink transmission The standard specifies several subframe configurations or resource allocations for TDD systems TDD UL DL Allocations Selects the configuration of the subframes in a radio frame in TDD systems The UL DL configuration or allocation defines the way each subframe is used for uplink downlink or if it is a special subframe The standard specifies seven different configurations 5 2 2 Defining Downlink Signal Characteristics U uplink D downlink
42. MIMO Setups ding of all control channels on CONFigure L TEEDE MIMO CROSStalk 22 2212 reri erret irai ai 2a EENG 203 CONFigure L TE DL MIMO CROSstalk State This command turns MIMO crosstalk compensation on and off Parameters State Example ON OFF RST OFF CONF DL MIMO CROS ON Turns crosstalk compensation on Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation 9 8 2 Remote Commands for DL Signal Characteristics 9 8 2 1 This chapter contains remote commands necessary to define downlink signal charac teristics For more information see chapter 5 2 Defining Downlink Signal Characteristics on page 95 e Defining the Physical Signal Charachersttce esn neeeneereneeeee 204 e Configuring the Physical Layer Cell Identtv aneneen 206 e Configuring MIMO Setups ENEE 208 e Configuring PDSCH Gubtrames enema 209 Defining the Physical Signal Characteristics CONFigure E TER DL CO eo BW 12122 huit rrt lur eee ehe ere ad Gael 204 CONFigureDETEEDLC CO eod e d atari veas ag cuz ena as Ceo eerie etae revente che 204 GONFigure E TE DL GC lt ccie E TDD UDGonf caccia tee EERSTEN eese 205 GONFigure ETEEDEE CG lt ecl gt TDDISPSG irit cerner ES 205 FEIGh GOscd Re dE 206 FETCh CO col FOSUBeatrlers i cocer coco a oes ga ba e T ESERE 206 CONFigure LTE DL CC lt cci gt BW Bandwidth This command selects the channel bandwidth Parameter
43. OSTP Shows the OFDM symbol transmit power as defined in 3GPP TS 36 141 It accumulates all subcarrier powers of the 4th OFDM symbol The 4th out of 14 OFDM symbols within a subframe in case of frame type 1 normal CP length contains exclusively PDSCH FETCh SUMMary OSTP AVERage on page 155 RSSI Shows the Received Signal Strength Indicator The RSSI is the complete sig nal power of the channel that has been measured regardless of the origin of the signal FETCh SUMMary RSSI AVERage on page 157 Power Shows the average time domain power of the analyzed signal FETCh SUMMary POWer AVERage on page 156 Crest Factor Shows the peak to average power ratio of captured signal FETCh SUMMary CRESt AVERage on page 152 Measuring the Power Over Time This chapter contains information on all measurements that show the power of a signal over time Capture BIB erret ea teta eut sei ee AE 34 Om OM POWER PPM 36 Power ve Symbol e TEE 38 Tire Alignment e 39 Capture Buffer The Capture Buffer result display shows the complete range of captured data for the last data capture The x axis represents time The maximum value of the x axis is equal to the Capture Time The y axis represents the amplitude of the captured UO data in dBm for RF input R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays Se SS EE EEE EE EEE EE EEE EEE SS SE EEE EE SS SS Se eee Capture Buffer Frame Start Offset 25 976ns Selecti
44. Offset gt This command defines the trigger offset Parameters lt Offset gt lt numeric value gt RST Os Default unit s Example TRIG HOLD 5MS Sets the trigger offset to 5 ms Remote Commands to Configure General Settings TRIGger SEQuence LEVel lt instrument gt EXTernal lt Level gt This command defines the level for an external trigger Parameters lt Level gt Range 0 5V to 3 5 V RST 1 4 V Default unit V Example TRIG LEV 2V Defines a trigger level of 2 V TRIGger SEQuence LEVel lt instrument gt POWer Level This command defines the trigger level for an IF power trigger Parameters Level Default unit DBM Example TRIG LEV POW 10 Defines a trigger level of 10 dBm TRIGger SEQuence PORT lt instrument gt Port This command selects the trigger port for measurements with devices that have sev eral trigger ports The R amp S FSW for example has several trigger ports Parameters Port PORT1 PORT2 PORTZ Example TRIG PORT PORT1 Selects trigger port 1 TRIGger SEQuence SLOPe lt Slope gt This command selects the trigger slope Parameters lt Slope gt POSitive Triggers a measurement when the signal rises to the trigger level NEGative Triggers a measurement when the signal falls to the trigger level Example TRIG SLOP POS Selects a positive trigger slope Remote Commands to Configure General Settings 9 7 4 Configuring Spectrum
45. Order or Intel format 7 2 Managing Frame Data Example The hexadecimal value 0x1D86E7BB would be decoded to 7 0655481E 3 For single antenna measurements the order of the UO data is either IQIQIQ or Il IQQ Q For MIMO measurements you also have to consider the antenna in the order of the data with alternating and Q data for every antenna Q antenna index symbol index Example For a two antenna system the string of data would like 10 0 Q0 0 11 0 Q1 0 10 1 Q0 1 11 1 Q1 1 10 2 Q0 2 Binary format iq tar format In case of the iq tar format the I Q data is stored in a compressed format with the file extension iq tar An iq tar file contains UO data in binary format together with meta information that describes the nature and the source of data e g the sample rate The objective of the iq tar file format is to separate I Q data from the meta information while still having both inside one file In addition the file format allows you to preview the I Q data in a web browser and allows you to include customized data An iq tar file must contain the following files e Q parameter XML file Contains meta information about the UO data e g sample rate The filename can be defined freely but there must be only one single UO parameter XML file inside an iq tar file e Q data binary file Contains the binary UO data of all channels There must be only one single UO data binary file i
46. Overview Kiko Pk Pu received sample uncompensated partially compen sated equalized in the frequency domain T useful symbol time Tg guard time Ts symbol time Overview The digital signal processing DSP involves several stages until the software can pres ent results like the EVM Data Capture Synchronizati P mE E UTRA LTE downlink Channel estimation equalization measurement application Analysis The contents of this chapter are structered like the DSP The LTE Downlink Analysis Measurement Application The block diagram in figure 8 1 shows the EUTRA LTE downlink measurement appli cation from the capture buffer containing the UO data to the actual analysis block The outcome of the fully compensated reference path green are the estimates of the transmitted data symbols au Depending on the user defined compensation the received samples Cu of the measurement path yellow still contain the transmitted signal impairments of interest The analysis block reveals these impairments by com paring the reference and the measurement path Prior to the analysis diverse synchro nization and channel estimation tasks have to be accomplished Synchronization The first of the synchronization tasks is to estimate the OFDM symbol timing which coarsely estimates both timing and carrier frequency offset The frame synchronization block determines the position of the P S Sync symbols in time and frequency by using the coarse frac
47. PDSCH 64QAM EVM Usage Query only Remote Commands to Read Numeric Results FETCh SUMMary EVM PCHannel MAXimum FETCh SUMMary EVM PCHannel MINimum FETCh SUMMary EVM PCHannel AVERage This command queries the EVM of all physical channel resource elements Return values lt EVM gt lt numeric value gt Minimum maximum or average EVM depending on the last command syntax element The unit is or dB depending on your selection Example FETC SUMM EVM PCH Returns the mean value Usage Query only FETCh SUMMary EVM PS IGnal MAXimum FETCh SUMMary EVM PSIGnal MINimum FETCh SUMMary EVM PSIGnal AVERage This command queries the EVM of all physical signal resource elements Return values lt EVM gt lt numeric value gt Minimum maximum or average EVM depending on the last command syntax element The unit is or dB depending on your selection Example FETC SUMM EVM PSIG Returns the mean value Usage Query only FETCh SUMMary FERRor MAXimum FETCh SUMMary FERRor MINimum FETCh SUMMary FERRor AVERage This command queries the frequency error Return values lt FreqError gt lt numeric value gt Minimum maximum or average frequency error depending on the last command syntax element Default unit Hz Example FETC SUMM FERR Returns the average frequency error in Hz Usage Query only Remote Commands to Read Numeric Results FETCh SUMMary GIMBalance MAXimum
48. Phase 62 Used Allocations ssesssssseeeeenn 99
49. Query DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe would return 1 Text Text parameters follow the syntactic rules of keywords You can enter text using a short or a long form For more information see chapter 9 2 1 Long and Short Form on page 143 Querying text parameters When you query text parameters the system returns its short form Example Setting SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE NORMal Query SENSe BANDwidth RESolution TYPE would return NORM Character Strings Strings are either text or number They have to be in straight quotation marks You can use a single quotation mark or a double quotation mark Example INSTRument DELete Spectrum Block Data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data The ASCII character introduces the data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 follow ing digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the trans mission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite for mat requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful Remote Commands to Select a Result Display when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations preven
50. Query only Remote Commands to Read Trace Data e Using tie e E MR Ae e ln ET WEE 158 e Reading Out Limit Check Results cenae inerenti 173 Using the TRACe DATA Command This chapter contains information on the TRACe DATA command and a detailed description of the characteristics of that command The TRACe DATA command queries the trace data or results of the currently active measurement or result display The type number and structure of the return values are specific for each result display In case of results that have any kind of unit the com mand returns the results in the unit you have currently set for that result display Note also that return values for results that are available for both downlink and uplink may be different For several result displays the command also supports various SCPI parameters in combination with the query If available each SCPI parameter returns a different aspect of the results If SCPI parameters are supported you have to quote one in the query 9 6 1 1 Remote Commands to Read Trace Data Example TRAC2 DATA TRACE1 The format of the return values is either in ASCII or binary characters and depends on the format you have set with FORMat DATA Following this detailed description you will find a short summary of the most important functions of the command TRACe DATA Adjacent Channel Leakage Rallo 2 oie teet rientra 159 Allocation ID vs Symbol x
51. S special subframe Conf of Special Subframe In combination with the cyclic prefix the special subframes serve as guard periods for switches from uplink to downlink They contain three parts or fields e DwPTS The DwPTS is the downlink part of the special subframe It is used to transmit downlink data e GP The guard period makes sure that there are no overlaps of up and downlink sig nals during a switch e UpPTS The UpPTS is the uplink part of the special subframe It is used to transmit uplink data The length of the three fields is variable This results in several possible configurations of the special subframe The LTE standard defines 10 different configurations for the special subframe However configurations 8 and 9 only work for a normal cyclic prefix If you select configurations 8 or 9 using an extended cyclic prefix or automatic detec tion of the cyclic prefix the software will show an error message Remote command Subframe CONFigure LTE DL CC lt cci gt TDD UDConf on page 205 Special subframe CONFigure LTE DL CC lt cci gt TDD SPSC on page 205 Configuring the Physical Layer Cell Identity The physical signal characteristics contain settings to describe the physical attributes of a downlink LTE signal The physical settings are part of the Downlink Signal Characteristics tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box Downlink Demodulation Settings Downlink Signal Characteristics Downlink Advan
52. The EUTRA frame structures are defined in 3GPP TS 36 211 For the generic frame structure the 10 ms radio frame is divided into 20 equally sized slots of 0 5 ms A subframe consists of two consecutive slots so one radio frame contains 10 subframes This is illustrated in figure 1 4 T expresses the basic time unit corresponding to 30 72 MHz Long Term Evolution Downlink Transmission Scheme One radio frame T 307200 x T 10 ms One slot Tss 15360 x T 0 5 ms LS One subframe Fig 1 4 Generic Frame Structure in EUTRA Downlink figure 1 5shows the structure of the downlink resource grid for the duration of one downlink slot The available downlink bandwidth consists of si subcarriers with a spacing of Af 15 kHz In the case of multi cell MBMS transmission a subcarrier spacing of Af 7 5 kHz is also possible sw can vary in order to allow for scalable bandwidth operation up to 20 MHz Initially the bandwidths for LTE were explicitly defined within layer 1 specifications Later on a bandwidth agnostic layer 1 was intro duced with sw for the different bandwidths to be specified by 3GPP RANA to meet performance requirements e g for out of band emission requirements and regulatory emission limits One downlink slot T ot Resource element One resource block Npe subcarriers NBE subcarriers NOE OFDM symbols Fig 1 5 Downlink Resource Grid One downlink slot consists of sx OFDM symbols To eac
53. a component carrier cluster 1to2 Selects a cluster uplink only lt cwnum gt 1 ton Selects a codeword lt k gt Selects a limit line Irrelevant for the LTE soft ware 9 2 Introduction Suffix Range Description lt m gt Selects a marker Irrelevant for the LTE soft ware lt n gt 1to4 Selects a measurement win dow lt subframe gt 0 to 39 Selects a subframe lt t gt Selects a trace Irrelevant for the LTE appli cation Introduction Commands are program messages that a controller e g a PC sends to the instru ment or software They operate its functions setting commands and request informa tion query commands Some commands only work either way setting only query only others work both ways setting and query The syntax of a SCPI command consists of a so called header and in most cases one or more parameters A query command must append a question mark after the last header element even if it contains a parameter A header contains one or more keywords separated by a colon Header and parame ters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank If there is more than one parameter for a command these are separated by a comma from one another This chapter summarizes the most important characteristics that you need to know when working with SCPI commands For a more complete description refer to the manual
54. automatically determines the subframe configuration for the PDSCH In the default state automatic configuration is on see Auto PDSCH Demodulation on page 89 Downlink Demodulation Settings Downlink Signal Characteristics Downlink Advanced Signal Characteristics PDSCH Subframe Configuration Configurable Subframes 1 Selected Subframe ce Used Allocations 4 Every LTE frame FDD and TDD contains 10 subframes In TDD systems some sub frames are used by the uplink however Each downlink subframe consists of one or more resource allocations The software shows the contents for each subframe in the configuration table In the configuration table each row corresponds to one allocation ID Code Enhanced VRB Number Offset Rho N RNTI Sch Modulation Settings Gap of RB RB Power dB Subframe configuration errors If there are any errors or conflicts between allocations in one or more subframes the software shows a icon in the column at the left of the table When you move the mouse over the icon the software shows the kind of error L DW bUAM e BEA Collision with allocation ID N RNTI 4 5 6 Before you start to work on the contents of each subframe you should define the num ber of subframes you want to customize with the Configurable Subframes parameter The software supports the configuration of up to 40 subframes Then you can select a particular subframe that you want t
55. by Symbol and Car rier is not available Instead you can filter by Symbol and Codeword The result display is updated as soon as you make the changes Note that the constellation selection is applied to all windows in split screen mode if the windows contain constellation diagrams Remote command Location CONFigure LTE DL CONS LOCation on page 150 3 6 Measuring Statistics This chapter contains information on all measurements that show the statistics of a sig nal UE RE 54 IG Mel EE 55 Allocation SUmMmMAY EEN 55 BE STEI oo a ee deene uge 56 Allocation ID vs Symbol x CaItiGh ccoinrce EN nee 57 Channel Decoder Results Liuius caen een cipe entities thi nn d i Eb nd naaa 58 CCDF Starts the Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function CCDF result display This result display shows the probability of an amplitude exceeding the mean power For the measurement the complete capture buffer is used The x axis represents the power relative to the measured mean power On the y axis the probability is plotted in 96 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays Crest Factor 69dB Selection Antenna 1 Bm a 0 01 0 001 0 0001 Remote command Selecting the result display CALCulate lt n gt FEED STA Querying results Ss DATA Signal Flow Starts the Signal Flow result display This result display shows the synchronization status of the current measurement It also sh
56. command defines the resource block offset of an allocation in a downlink sub frame Parameters lt Offset gt lt numeric value gt RST 0 Example CONF DL SUBF2 ALL5 RBOF 3 Defines a resource block offset of 3 for allocation 5 in subframe 2 9 8 3 Remote Commands for DL Advanced Signal Characteristics This chapter contains remote commands necessary to define advanced downlink sig nal characteristics For more information see chapter 5 3 Defining Advanced Signal Characteristics on page 105 9 8 3 1 Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation e Configuring the Synchronization Signal 214 e Configuring the Reference Signal nennen nnn nnns 215 e Configuring the Positioning Reference Gionsal 215 e Configuring the CSI Reference Signal sss 216 e Configuring the Control Channel cident ccce ditas rerit ta rnt tnu o 218 e Defining the PDSCH Resource Block Symbol Offset 222 e Configuring Shared Channel 223 Configuring the Synchronization Signal CONFigure L TEE DL CC cci SYNC ANTenna 2 1 iiirees eene tenen nane nu nhnh nena na tranne sina 214 CONFigure L TEL DL SN PbOWer nennen nnnnenn tre rrr nnne nnns 214 CON Le CR NR el de EE 214 CONFigure LTE DL CC lt cci gt SYNC ANTenna lt Antenna gt This command selects the antenna that transmits the P SYNC and the S SYNC Parameters lt Antenna gt ANT1 ANT2 ANT3 ANT4 ALL NONE RST A
57. common phase error CPE According to 3GPP TS 25 913 and 3GPP TR 25 892 the uncompensated samples can be expressed as jo j2z Ns NGC j2n Ns Nr Afe TAI ds A Hig eli ei s Neer ell s N rrr Afres 3 Nu Eemere CPE SFO res CFO 8 1 where e the data symbol is a on subcarrier k at OFDM symbol e the channel transfer function is h e the number of Nyquist samples is N within the symbol time T e the useful symbol time T T T e the independent and Gaussian distributed noise sample is n Within one OFDM symbol both the CPE and the residual CFO cause the same phase rotation for each subcarrier while the rotation due to the SFO depends linearly on the subcarrier index A linear phase increase in symbol direction can be observed for the residual CFO as well as for the SFO The results of the tracking estimation block are used to compensate the samples rik The LTE Downlink Analysis Measurement Application Whereas a full compensation is performed in the reference path the signal impair ments that are of interest to the user are left uncompensated in the measurement path After having decided the data symbols in the reference path an additional phase track ing can be utilized to refine the CPE estimation 8 3 2 Channel Estimation and Equalizitaion As shown in figure 8 1 there is one coarse and one fine channel estimation block The reference signal based coarse estimation is tapped behind the CFO compensation
58. defined by the cell identity group This sequence is part of the S SYNC In addition to the synchronization information the cell ID also determines e the cyclic shifts for PCFICH PHICH and PDCCH mapping e the frequency shifts of the reference signal The software shows the currently selected cell ID in the header table CP Cell ID Remote command Cell ID CONFigure LTE DL CC cci PLC CID on page 206 Cell Identity Group setting CONFigure LTE DL CC cci PLC CIDGroup on page 207 Cell Identity Group query FETCh CC cci PLC CIDGroup on page 207 Identity setting CONFigure LTE DL CC cci PLC PLID on page 207 Identity query FETCh CC cci PLC PLID on page 208 5 2 3 Configuring MIMO Measurements The DUT MIMO Configuration and the Tx Antenna Selection are the same as in the Analyzer Config MIMO Setup tab General Settings if you change them in one place they are also changed in the other For more information see MIMO Configuration on page 79 User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 98 Defining Downlink Signal Characteristics 5 2 4 Configuring PDSCH Subframes The software allows you to configure individual subframes that are used to carry the information of the PDSCH The PDSCH Physical Downlink Shared Channel primarily carries all general user data It therefore takes up most of the space in a radio frame When you turn Auto Demodulation on the software
59. diagram area click anywhere in the diagram area and drag the contents of the diagram area until the parts you d like to see are visible If there are parts of the trace data that are outside the visible display area the software shows arrows to the right of the diagram area The arrows point in the direction where the invisible trace data is If parts of the trace data is outside the visible area the arrows are yellow If all data in a particular direction is outside the visible area the arrows turn red To make sure that the whole trace is always visible you can use the automatic zoom Auto XY available in the Zoom menu gt Open the context menu and select the Pan menu item The software opens a submenu with several panning options ai x Fig 6 3 Panning options e Panning vertically and horizontally XY Panning is possible in all directions e Panning horizontally X Panning is possible to the left and right e Panning vertically Y Panning is possible upwards and downwards Copying an image to the clipboard If you want to document measurement results you can move a copy of them to the clipboard of the operating system gt Open the context menu and select the Copy to Clipboard menu item Importing and Exporting UO Data 7 Data Management 7 1 For easy handling of special measurement configurations the software allows you to import or export various kinds of data Importing and Exporting UO
60. initiated a measurement If the file contents are not valid or the file could not be found the software shows an error message A connection to an analyzer or a dongle is required to successfully load a file For more information see chapter 7 1 Importing and Exporting UO Data on page 122 Remote command Input source selection SENSe INPut on page 183 Loading UO data from file MMEMory LOAD 10 STATe on page 227 4 1 3 Configuring the Input Level The level settings contain settings that control the input level of any analyzer in the measurement setup You can control the input level for any of the input channels you are using separately from the dropdown menu next to the Level Settings label The level settings are part of the General Settings tab of the General Settings dia log box R amp S FS K100 102 104PC General Settings General Analyzer Config MIMO Setup Trigger Spectrum Advanced Level Settings Input Channel 1 Auto Level E Reference Level RF 30 00dBm Attenuation RF 10d Ext Att 000dB Defining a Reference Level eicere eee eene ttr ket bL eue eL Rn eet 71 Altenuaung hd CL ET 72 Defining a Reference Level The reference level is the power level the analyzer expects at the RF input Keep in mind that the power level at the RF input is the peak envelope power in case of signals with a high crest factor like LTE To get the best dynamic range you have to set the ref
61. is useful for known channel conditions In that case the sched uling and MIMO precoding can be optimized If the channel conditions are unknown distributed transmission is used Distributed transmission utilizes the frequency diversity in that the information is distributed over the selected frequency range Remote command CONFigure LTE DL EPDCch LOCalized on page 218 Configuring the Shared Channel The shared channel settings contain settings that describe the characteristics of the shared channels 5 4 5 4 1 Defining MBSFN Characteristics The shared channel settings are part of the Downlink Advanced Signal Characteris tics tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box Downlink Demodulation Settings Downlink Signal Characteristics Downlink Advanced Signal Characteristics M Shared Channel Settings Bee pea 5 PDSCH Power Ratio Selects the PDSCH P_B parameter that defines the cell specific ratio of rho_B to rho_A according to 3GPP TS 36 213 table 5 2 1 The table below shows the resulting values as a function of the number of antennas In 0 000 dB 0 969 dB 0 969 dB 0 000 dB 2 218 dB 1 249 dB 3 979 dB 3 010 dB If you select p B p A 1 the ratio is always 1 regardless of the number of antennas Remote command CONFigure LTE DL PDSCh PB on page 223 Defining MBSFN Characteristics The MBSFN settings contain settings to configure Multimedia Broadcast Single F
62. key Note that you can select the antenna port only if the UE RS weights phase mea surement is selected R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays UE specific RS Weights Selection Subfr 0 Tx1 AP 5 7 Max 13010dB 1 905 MHz Min 13 010 dB 0 900 MHz 13 0103 xg 0103 Magnitude dB 13 0103 0 Frequency MHz Remote command Selecting the result display Querying results UE RS Weights Phase Starts the UE RS Weights Phase result display This result display shows the phase of the measured weights of the UE specific refer ence signal carriers You can use it to calculate the phase difference between different antenna ports The x axis represents the frequency with the unit depending on your tion The y axis shows the phase of each reference signal in degree The results correspond to the data of one subframe Thus the result display shows results if you have selected a particular subframe gt Subfr tion You can select the antenna port to be measured via the nin ion soft key Note that you can select the antenna port only if the UE RS weights phase mea surement is selected UE specific RS Weights Selection Subfr 0 Tx1 AP 5 7 Phase Max 36 000 0 900 MHz Min 36 000 1 350 MHz 0 Frequency MHz Remote command Selecting the result display Querying results User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 61 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Di
63. measure one EPDCCH PRB set at a time If you have to mea sure a signal with more than one EPDCCH PRB set you have to configure each set separately and refresh the UO data for each set You can define several parameters for the EPDCCH 5 3 7 Defining Advanced Signal Characteristics EPDCCH PRO PAN edet cetrere Ge Eege 115 EPDCCOH SEG DE e m 115 Si EIB RENE 115 EPDOCH Ee lu 115 EPDCCOH Localized E 115 EPDCCH PRB Pairs Selects the number of resource blocks used in an EPDCCH PRB set If you select the Disabled item the EPDCCH is turned off For more information see 3GPP TS 36 213 numberPRBPairs r11 Remote command CONFigure LTE DL EPDCch NPRB on page 219 EPDCCH Set ID Defines the EPDCCH set ID The set ID controls the generation of reference symbols for the EPDCCH For more information see TS36 211 6 10 3A 1 Remote command CONFigure LTE DL EPDCch SID On page 219 EPDCCH Rel Power Defines the power of the EPDCCH relative to the reference signal Remote command CONFigure LTE DL EPDCch POWer on page 219 EPDCCH RB Assignment Defines the location of the resource blocks that the EPDCCH is transmitted in For more information see 3GPP TS 36 213 resourceBlockAssignment r11 Remote command CONFigure LTE DL EPDCch RBASsign on page 219 EPDCCH Localized Turns localized transmission of the EPDCCH on and off Localized transmission
64. measurements Parameters lt Channel gt EUTRA Selects an EUTRA signal of the same bandwidth like the TX channel as assumed adjacent channel carrier UTRA128 Selects an UTRA signal with a bandwidth of 1 28MHz as assumed adjacent channel carrier UTRA384 Selects an UTRA signal with a bandwidth of 3 84MHz as assumed adjacent channel carrier UTRA768 Selects an UTRA signal with a bandwidth of 7 68MHz as assumed adjacent channel carrier RST EUTRA Example POW ACH AACH UTRA384 Selects an UTRA signal with a bandwidth of 3 84MHz as assumed adjacent channel carrier SENSe POWer NCORrection lt State gt This command turns noise correction for ACLR measurements on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example POW NCOR ON Activates noise correction SENSe SWEep EGATe AUTO State This command turns auto gating for SEM and ACLR measurements on and off This command is available for TDD measurements in combination with an external or IF power trigger Parameters State ON Evaluates the on period of the LTE signal only OFF Evaluates the complete signal Example SWE EGAT AUTO ON Turns auto gating on 9 7 5 9 7 5 1 9 7 5 2 Remote Commands to Configure General Settings Remote Commands for Advanced Settings This chapter contains all remote control commands to control the advanced settings For more information on advanced settings see chapter 4 5 Advanced Settings
65. nente nenne 201 SENSe LTE DL DEMod BESTimation State This command turns boosting estimation for downlink signals on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example DL DEM BEST ON Turns boosting estimation on SENSe LTE DL DEMod CESTimation Type This command selects the channel estimation type for downlink signals Parameters Type TGPP 3GPP EVM definition PIL Optimal pilot only PILP Optimal pilot and payload RST TGPP Example DL DEM CEST TGPP Use 3GPP EVM definition for channel estimation Compensating Measurement Errors GENSSILUTELDLTRACKing PH pe tette tte ttt tte ttt tta 202 GENSSIUTEIDLTRACKnOTIME tentent tnter tnt ttt nct 202 9 8 1 5 Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation SENSe LTE DL TRACking PHASe lt Type gt This command selects the phase tracking type for downlink signals Parameters lt Type gt OFF Deactivate phase tracking PIL Pilot only PILP Pilot and payload RST OFF Example DL TRAC PHAS PILPAY Use pilots and payload for phase tracking SENSe LTE DL TRACking TIME State This command turns timing tracking for downlink signals on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DL TRAC TIME ON Activates timing tracking Configuring EVM Measurements SENSej L TE DL DEMod EVMCalc senses tte e tntteni 202 SENSe E
66. of consecutive DL subframes in that PRS are transmitted Remote command CONFigure LTE DL PRSS NPRS on page 216 5 3 4 Defining Advanced Signal Characteristics Relative Power Positioning Reference Signal Defines the power of a PRS resource element in relation to the power of a common reference signal resource element Remote command CONFigure LTE DL PRSS POWer on page 216 Frame Number Offset Defines the system frame number of the current frame that you want to analyze Because the positioning reference signal and the CSI reference signal usually have a periodicity of several frames for some reference signal configurations is it necessary to change the expected system frame number of the frame to be analyzed Note that if you define the frame number offset for either reference signal it is automat ically defined for both reference signals Remote command CONFigure LTE DL SFNO on page 216 Configuring Channel State Information Reference Signal The channel state information reference signal CSI RS settings contain settings to describe the physical attributes and structure of the Channel State Information Refer ence Signal CSI RS CSI RS are used to estimate the channel properties of the signal propagation channel from the base station to the user equipement This information is quantized and fed back to the base station The base station makes use of this information for example to adjust the beamforming paramete
67. of input channels LTE bandwidth If you do not save the calibration data calibration becomes invalid when you change one of the parameters mentioned above or use different equipment oscilloscope User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 137 Performing Time Alignment Measurements cables etc The current calibration state is displayed in a status bar at the top of the user interface Remote command CALibration PHASe GENerate on page 149 Restoring previously recorded calibration data If you have previously saved calibration data you can restore it later on without having to recalibrate the measurement gt Load the previously recorded file via drag and drop or the Load Calibration Data softkey The software restores the frequency reference level MIMO configuration and LTE bandwidth that were active during calibration Note Auto leveling is cancelled if you restore calibration data Instead the refer ence level is set to the value stored in the calibration file Remote command CALibration PHASe LOAD on page 149 Performing beamforming phase measurement After you are done calibrating the measurement you can configure the actual phase measurement Except for the parameters saved in the calibration file you can change settings and configure the signal as required When all is set up perform the actual measurement The software corrects the UE RS Weights Phase Difference and Cell RS Weights Phase Difference result displa
68. power A special hardware setup is required for this measurement since the actual measurement is done at very low power during the transmitter OFF periods requiring low attenuation at the analyzer input The signal power during the transmitter ON periods in this test scenario is usually higher than the specified maximum input power of the R amp S FSx sig nal analyzer and will cause severe damage to the analyzer if the measurement is not set up appropriately Test setup R amp S FSx with R amp S FSx B25 Ext reference signal Attenuator RF Limiter Performing Transmit On Off Power Measurements To protect the analyzer input from damage an RF limiter has to be applied at the ana lyzer input connector as can be seen in figure 2 16 Table 1 1 shows the specifications the used limiter has to fulfill Min acceptable CW input power BTS output power minus 10 dB Min acceptable peak input power BTS peak output power minus 10 dB Max output leakage 20 dBm Max response time 1 us Max recovery time 1 us An additional 10 dB attenuation should be placed in front of the RF limiter to absorb eventual reflected waves because of the high VSWR of the limiter The allowed maxi mum CW input power of the attenuator must be lower than the maximum output power of the BTS Performing the measurement For the transmit ON OFF power measurements according to 36 141 6 4 the test model E TM1 1 has to be used For more inform
69. prn 98 EE eege ees 86 ul ale ELE 90 Number of RB 95 P SYNC relative power eren 106 PBGH eerte s 11d POFPIGELD aere 111 PDSCH reference data sess 93 PDSCH subframe detection essuusss 90 Eegeregie edel eeneg ess 92 BAG ME 112 EUR E 110 Ref Level relative POWER eode Ee tene RAEE 106 S SYNCG relative POWT entrer 106 Scrambling of coded bits sx 9d Selected Subframe 99 SOUrte ees mt Standard 68 Swap l Q n wie 85 TDD UL DL Allocations ene 96 Errem 92 Trigger level 4 81 Trigger mode 22 491 Trigger offset 4 81 Used Allocations 99 Signal TlOW EE 55 Softkey Const Selectiohi n crt t pec ect reis 53 Software license 2 10 Source Input aie LO Spectrum mask we 45 Standard Selection 68 Status Bar uuo Subframe Configuration Table suussss 99 Subframe EMOT e creer etie ev eee tont aeria 99 cde 85 T TDD UL DL Allocations 96 Timing Error Title Bar Trigger level Trigger mode Trigger offset U UE Specific RS Weights Magnitude 60 UE Specific RS Weights Phase 61 UE Specific RS Weights Difference Magnitude 62 UE Specific RS Weights Difference
70. scheme The range is 0 14 e 0 unrecognized e 1 RBPSK e 2 QPSK e 3 16QAM e 4 64QAM e 5 8PSK e 6 PSK e 7 mixed modulation e 8 BPSK e 14 256QAM number of symbols or bits In hexadecimal mode this represents the number of symbols to be transmitted In binary mode it represents the number of bits to be transmitted lt PHICH duration Represents the PHICH duration The range is 1 2 e 1 normal e 2 extended 9 6 2 9 6 2 1 Remote Commands to Read Trace Data lt PHICH resource gt Represents the parameter N The range is 1 4 e 1 N 1 6 e 2 N 1 2 e 3 N 1 e 4 N 2 TRACe DATA lt Result gt This command returns the trace data for the current measurement or result display For more information see chapter 9 6 1 Using the TRACe DATA Command on page 158 Query parameters TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 LIST PBCH PCFICH PHICH PDCCH PDSCH Usage Query only Reading Out Limit Check Results e Checking Limits for Graphical Result Displavs nees 173 e Checking Limits for Numerical Result Display 176 Checking Limits for Graphical Result Displays CALCulate lt n gt LlMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RESUIt esee 173 CAL Culate nz LUlMitzks ACBowerAl TemateREGult esent 174 CAL Culate nzM AbkermFUNGCHon bOWer RE Gud CUpRent nenen eeenenneeeenseo 175 CAL Culat sp gt LIMitsk sOOPOwerOFFPOWEl ccii ccccecrsiiaescctewsecdasecuisennceenyvaencaneiuneaandebias 175 CAL Culate n
71. settings contain settings that define certain aspects of those measurements The On Off Power measurement settings are part of the General Settings tab of the General Settings dialog box General Analyzer Config MIMO Setup Trigger Spectrum Advanced ON OFF Power Measurement Settings Number of Frames 10 Noise Correction i Carrier Aggregation Iw Frequency Lower Edge 950 MHz Frequency Higher Edge 1 05 GHz Number of Frame Saona na E TT BEER 78 cg TTT 78 Number of Frames Defines the number of frames that are averaged to calculate a reliable power trace for On Off Power measurements Remote command CONFigure LTE OOPower NFRames on page 190 4 2 Configuring MIMO Measurement Setups Noise Correction Turns noise correction for On Off Power measurements on and off Remote command SENSe LTE OOPower NCORrection on page 190 Carrier Aggregation The software supports Transmit On Off Power measurements with carrier aggregation To turn on measurements on more than one carrier check the Carrier Aggregation parameter If on the Frequency Lower Edge and Frequency Higher Edge field become available When defining the lower and higher frequency make sure to that the values are valid e The center frequency of the master component carrier gt Defining the Signal Fre quency has to be within the bandwidth defined by the lower and higher edge fre quencies e The bandwidth defined by th
72. start to the stop of the off period is the period over which the limits are checked It corresponds to the yellow trace in the graphic result display e Time at A to Limit Shows the trace point at which the lowest distance between trace and limit line has been detected The result is a time relative to the frame start e OFF Power Abs dBm Shows the absolute power of the signal at the trace point with the lowest distance to the limit line e OFF Power A to Limit Shows the distance between the trace and the limit line of the trace point with the lowest distance to the limit line in dB e Falling Transition Period Shows the length of the falling transient e Rising Transition Period Shows the length of the rising transient ees User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 36 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays eS EE EEE EEE EOE EEE EEE SE EEE EE EE SS SE ee Note that the beginning and end of a transition period is determined based on the Off Power Density Limit This limit is defined by 3GPP in TS 36 141 as the maxi mum allowed mean power spectral density The length of the transient from on to off period is for example the distance from the detected end of the subframe to the last time that the signal power is above the measured mean power spectral density power time Fig 3 3 Power profile of an TD LTE On to Off transition The transition lasts from the end of the OFF period until the signal is
73. suffix and you need to use the suffix you have to include the optional keyword Otherwise the suffix is recognized as a 1 Optional keywords are emphasized with square brackets Example Without a numeric suffix in the optional keyword SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as FREQuency CENTer With a numeric suffix in the optional keyword DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe DISPlay ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 1 no suffix DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON enables the zoom in window 4 Vertical Stroke A vertical stroke indicates alternatives for a specific keyword You can use both key words to the same effect Example SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution In the short form without optional keywords BAND 1MHZ would have the same effect as BWID 1MHZ Introduction 9 2 5 SCPI Parameters 9 2 5 1 Many commands feature one or more parameters If a command supports more than one parameter these are separated by a comma Example LAYout ADD WINDow Spectrum LEFT MTABle Parameters may have different forms of values N mene ValuB5 cuin verre n Fay voe oe aver S ead P R eco passin saeadadaasiaendeneans 145 CEMENTERIO 146 MEI EE 146 een CN 146 6 JBIOCI BO EE 146 Numeric Values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point or exponent In case of physical quantities you can also add the unit If the unit is missing
74. the com mand uses the basic unit Example with unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ without unit SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1E9 would also set a frequency of 1 GHz Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down If the number you have entered is not supported e g in case of discrete steps the command returns an error Querying numeric values When you query numeric values the system returns a number In case of physical quantities it applies the basic unit e g Hz in case of frequencies The number of dig its after the decimal point depends on the type of numeric value Example Setting SENSe FREQuency CENTer 1GHZ Query SENSe FREQuency CENTer would return 1E9 In some cases numeric values may be returned as text e INEININE Infinity or negative infinity Represents the numeric values 9 9E37 or 9 9E37 e NAN Not a number Represents the numeric value 9 91E37 NAN is returned in case of errors 9 2 5 2 9 2 5 3 9 2 5 4 9 2 5 5 Introduction Boolean Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represen ted by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 Querying boolean parameters When you query boolean parameters the system returns either the value 1 ON or the value 0 OFF Example Setting DISPlay WINDow ZOOM STATe ON
75. to Configure the Demodulation Configuring component carriers If you want to configure the second component carrier CC2 make sure to include the C C2 part of the syntax Example CONF DL CC2 BW 10 Remote Commands for PDSCH Demodulation Settings 199 Remote Commands for DL Signal Characteristics sseessssssss 204 Remote Commands for DL Advanced Signal Characteristics 213 Remote Commands for MBSFN Settings 223 Remote Commands for PDSCH Demodulation Settings This chapter contains remote commands necessary to define PDSCH demodulation For more information see chapter 5 1 Configuring Downlink Signal Demodulation on page 89 e Selecting the Demodulation Method 200 e Configuring Multicarrier Base Giatons nenn 200 Configuring Parameter ESHWImatio cca ccs ttt htt ee ta et nee Dee 201 e Compensating Measurement Erors nennen 201 9 8 1 1 Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation e Configuring EVM Measurements ccscccccsssssrcecesssnreeeessesnreeeessesreecssesureeeeseaaas 202 e Processing Demodulated Eat 5 etre o e OR Iq ee Ra Ra Ce de Exo ree A Ends 203 e Configuring MIMO Setups EE 203 Selecting the Demodulation Method GENSSIUTETDLDEMod AUTO 200 SENSe L TE DL FORMatPSCD ecce tte tent ttt tet teta 200 SENSe L TE DL DEMod AUTO State This command
76. your remote scripting tool and the software Because the software runs directly on the PC and not an R amp S instrument you have to connect the remote script ing tool to your PC and not an instrument 9 1 1 2 P Start the software If you want to capture UO data from an analyzer connect the software to that ana lyzer Start the remote scripting tool e g Matlab on the PC Connect the remote scripting tool to the local host e g TCPIC LocalHost Overview of Remote Command Suffixes sesenta 142 leiere Dier LEE 143 Remote Commands to Select a Result Display 147 Remote Commands to Perform Measurements enses 148 Remote Commands to Read Numeric HResuhts sees 151 Remote Commands to Read Trace Data eene 158 Remote Commands to Configure General Settings ssesssss 181 Remote Command to Configure the Democdulaton 199 CONNGUMING ie SoORWBEI creer terea tr Eat ee tete d ate c ieee ieee PRX RR 225 Managing P PH 2 226 Overview of Remote Command Suffixes This chapter provides an overview of all suffixes used for remote commands in the LTE application Suffix Range Description allocation 0 to 99 Selects an allocation instrument 1to8 Selects an instrument for MIMO measurements antenna 2to4 Selects an antenna for MIMO measurements lt cci gt 1to2 Selects
77. 1 FETCh SUMMary EVM PCHannel AVERage on page 154 EVM Phys Signal Shows the EVM for all physical signal resource elements in the analyzed frame The reference signal for example is a physical signal For more information see 3GPP 36 211 FETCh SUMMary EVM PSIGnal AVERage on page 154 Frequency Error Shows the difference in the measured center frequency and the reference center frequency FETCh SUMMary FERRor AVERage on page 154 Sampling Error Shows the difference in measured symbol clock and reference symbol clock relative to the system sampling rate FETCh SUMMary SERRor AVERage on page 157 UO Offset Shows the power at spectral line 0 normalized to the total transmitted power FETCh SUMMary IQOFfset AVERage on page 155 UO Gain Imbalance Shows the logarithm of the gain ratio of the Q channel to the I channel FETCh SUMMary GIMBalance AVERage on page 155 UO Quadrature Error Shows the measure of the phase angle between Q channel and I channel deviating from the ideal 90 degrees FETCh SUMMary QUADerror AVERage on page 156 3 2 Measuring the Power Over Time RSTP Shows the reference signal transmit power as defined in 3GPP TS 36 141 It is required for the DL RS Power test It is an average power and accumulates the powers of the reference symbols within a subframe divided by the number of reference symbols within a sub frame FETCh SUMMary RSTP AVERage on page 157
78. 14 GONFigure LTE DLECC BW tei taceat tutte tenait det e etes reas ertt endo eio ena Dk pen Pete aes 204 CONFigure L TE DL CC lt cci gt C OBEOfIX cuc tte Sege de conc tut reet e o att 204 CONFigureEL TET DLEFCCseci EMIMO ASEELectiori 2 ctae cott eee tenen tee 208 CONFigure LTE DEEECC lt cci gt EMIMO GONE ig icon ta teta tute tdeo Ee de Oraa vies ine eR 208 GONFigureEETETBEEGOSCCOISEMIMQO SUDGADP iiir cuite rr aet rece ep retient itae 199 Ee TSCHERNER 206 CONFigure LTE DU CC lt cci EPEC CIDGFOUD sido dtt naan rear evade EEN 207 GONFigureEF ETE BE GOscoIS EPEG PLEID s c isin c reus tiep r e cea rec tuis 207 CONFigureEETEEDIH CCs6eciS SYNG ANT6nDr t cnt EEN 214 CONFigure LTE DUE CC lt cciF ET 205 GONFigureE ETETEDEH GCOseGIS ETDD UBDGOhnYf recor ioco oct trt eec iter tice iion 205 gi ee UC RR EU GE le ctt ttn tr rl e hr het err t n Ere enn ep Recent ntn 182 CONFigure NR RI EE 182 Igel UC RR ET Be Keller 191 CONFigure LTE OOPOWer NERAImOS rccte ite Eed EES 190 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SELect DISPlayEWINDow E RK TT DlSblavtWiNDow nzTRACectGTSCALelbRlEvelOEtF Get 185 FETCh SUMMary CRESEMAXImUt i east tornare tenth xa th Fh ka da FR EXE Ee hane EE UR HERR dE 152 FETCh SUMMaty GRESEMINimUITI rerit rr hr arn nth n Rt ER EX NEEN 152 Le en Ee Re KE 152 FETCh SUMMary EVM DSQP MAXIImUET iioii tn retra enr eri nothin ETATE EE 153 FETCRh SUMMaty EVM DSQP MINitmU ttI
79. 1D provide a special 1 bit flag for this pur pose Localized Distributed VRB Assignment Another bit in the DCI formats controls whether the first or second bit is applied Remote command CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt GAP on page 210 Number of RB Defines the number of resource blocks the allocation covers The number of resource blocks defines the size or bandwidth of the allocation If you allocate too many resource blocks compared to the bandwidth you have set the software will show a icon in the column at the left of the table Remote command CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt RBCount on page 213 Offset RB Sets the resource block at which the allocation begins Defining Downlink Signal Characteristics A wrong offset for any allocation would lead to an overlap of allocations In that case the software will show an error message Remote command CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt RBOFfset on page 213 Power Sets the boosting of the allocation Boosting is the allocation s power relative to the ref erence signal power Remote command CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt POWer on page 211 Conflict Move the mouse over the icon to see details on the conflict Possible conflicts are e Allocation exceeds available bandwidth A bandwidth e
80. 2 17 73 Configuring the Measurement Maximum Number of Subframes per Frame to Analyze Selects the maximum number of subframes that the software analyzes and therefore improves measurement speed Reducing the number of analyzed subframes may become necessary if you define a capture time of less than 20 1 ms For successful synchronization all subframes that you want to analyze must be in the capture buffer You can make sure that this is the case by using for example an external frame trigger signal For maximum measurement speed turn off Auto According to Standard and set the Number of Frames to Analyze to 1 These settings prevent the software from capturing more than once for a single run measurement Remote command SENSe LTE FRAMe SCOunt on page 186 Configuring Measurement Results The measurement result settings contain settings that define certain aspects of the results that are displayed The result settings are part of the General Settings tab of the General Settings dia log box General Analyzer Contig MIMO Setup Trigger Spectrum Advanced Result Settings EVM Unit v Bit Stream Format Symbols gt Carrier Axes Carrier Number x Subframe Selection E Antenna Selection T Et otis sed 74 Bit Stream Foral idrico re ee eet n i arc Greed Feb dedu edd 74 CANON ARES PE 75 laten Le EEN 75 ue E 76 EVM Unit Selects the unit for graphic and numerical EVM measureme
81. 2 CONFigure LTE DL 5SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt PRECoding CBINdex lt CBIndex gt This command selects the codebook index for an allocation with spatial multiplexing precoding scheme Parameters CBIndex 0 15 RST 1 Example CONF DL SUBF2 ALL4 PREC CBIN 3 Selects codebook index 3 for allocation 4 in subframe number 2 CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt PRECoding CLMapping lt Mapping gt This command selects the codeword to layer mapping Parameters lt Mapping gt LC11 LC21 LC31 LC41 LC22 LC32 LC42 LC52 LC62 LC72 LC82 Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation Example CONF DL SUBF2 ALL3 PREC CLM LC11 Assigns codeword to layer mapping 1 1 to allocation 3 in sub frame 2 CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt PRECoding CDD lt State gt This command turns the cyclic delay diversity of an allocation with spatial multiplexing precoding scheme on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF DL SUBF2 ALL3 PREC CDD ON Turns the cylic delay diversity for allocation 3 in subframe 2 on CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt PRECoding SCHeme lt Scheme gt This command selects the precoding scheme of an allocation Parameters lt Scheme gt NONE Do not use a precoding scheme BF Use beamforming scheme SPM Use spatial mul
82. 2 Long Term Evolution Downlink Transmission Scheme sees 9 2A ORDMA CR 9 1 2 2 OFDMA Parametertzatton eene eene nnne 10 1 23 Downlink Data Transmission emen 12 1 2 4 Downlink Reference Signal Structure and Cell Gearch 12 1 2 5 Downlink Physical Layer Procedures emen 14 LEM 1 11 n 14 3467 5 e 16 241 Licensing the Software eere EEN Yu ERAAN E EE Yu ER Ru EX YR RN RES ER YN ERR SER Eas 16 2 2 Installing the Software eeeeesseeeeeeeneeeenenen nennen nnne nn nennen nnns 19 2 3 Connecting the Computer to an Analyzer 19 2 9 1 Instrument Configuration rrt c ene T E RD FER e ERR CERE RRR 19 2 9 2 Figuring Out IP AddreSSes erns E R 22 24 Application OVErView 2 scs0ccccccssececcssssccceesseseceecenssosecesssscccesesscoueceensseccoesssnscecesteass 25 2 5 Configuring the Software seeseeessseseseseeeeeeen nennen nnn nenne nennen nennen nnne 28 2 5 1 Configuring the Display neret ap en ARTE Eee RE Ret EAE 28 2 5 2 Configuring the Software deep n MER INE 29 3 Measurements and Result Displays eere 31 3 1 Numerical Results ocio iniit sick ne ENTENEN ANTES NENES 32 3 2 Measuring the Power Over Titme ccccccesseecesesseeeceeseseeesenseeeeeeensnesneesenseseeeesneeseneesens 34 3 3 Measuring the Error Vector Magnitude
83. 7 MMEMory STORe DEMeodsettirig rrr re hn d RD a n VERRE ED ge Se a 227 MMEMOory STORGHO S Le etie uereg Suerg EE Rent rie neu lo PEL I CR RR Eeer 228 le e 183 TRAGCeO DBDATA 2 ctt 173 TRIGger SEQuence HOLbBoffsinstrumbents scitote tete ri ri ter tt rid eti eth ra avra rb ir Per ses 192 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel instrument POWer errem rer nr nnn reri neruos 193 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel instrument EXTernal 2 cir ntn rire 193 TRIGger SEQuence l MODE treu tri t meret ree eon e Ee tecrie E Hd trc cbe a Per os equ E RR Quae 192 TRIGger SEQuence POR L instr mente reir rre rr eerte rtr eet ee P Ein 193 TRIGger SEQuence SLOPE kiparisas ner eer e iere RR n e OR EE Ce en Kd pn 193 INN 187 UI 187 Bing ET 187 Index A os ae Allocation ID vs symbol x carrier E Allocation Summary eser rre natnra nera eroe ed Auto Detection Cell Identity sssse Auto POSCH Demodulation sess B Balanced Input oret tete Beamform Allocation Summary Bit stream M M Boosting estimation i nre tre ree C Capture TEE 34 Captute Titme o oci ege deeg 73 en d ie ceess 54 ie g r 98 Cell Identity Group ctt ree niet te rr retine 98 Cell RS We
84. Configuring the Synchronization Sons 105 5 3 2 Configuring the Reference Gonal emen 106 5 3 3 Configuring Positioning Reference Gionals em 106 5 3 4 Configuring Channel State Information Reference Giona 108 5 3 5 Defining the PDSCH Resource Block Symbol Offset 110 5 3 6 Configuring the Control Channel 110 5 3 7 Configuring the Shared Channel 115 5 4 Defining MBSFN Characteristics eeeeeeeeeeeeeeennennenenen nnne nnn nnns 116 541 Configuring MBSFN S enm eene REE aE aeina Ennai an nnne 116 5 4 2 Configuring MBSFN Gubtrames unane nnn 117 6 Analyzing Measurement Results eere 119 EET ea Lats pro me 122 7 1 Importing and Exporting UO Data eeeeenennenenennnnnenen nn nnn 122 T2 Managing Frame Dalta mettent ER Er EE 123 7 3 Importing and Exporting Limits eeeeeeeeeeeenennenenennnn nnnm 124 8 Measurement Basics eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eee ee entren nnne 126 8 1 Symbols and Variabloes eerte tinta aeneis 126 ou 127 8 3 The LTE Downlink Analysis Measurement Application 127 D o NEE iere TE e DEE 127 8 3 2 Channel Estimation and Eoualtzitaion nennen 129 EMPIRE 129 8 4 MIMO Measurement Guide eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeen nennen nennen nnne 130 8 4 1 MIMO Measurements with Signal Analvzerg see 131 8 4 2 MIM
85. DSCH Subframe Configuration Detection Physical Detection z Auto PDSCH Demogdtulatio curn ESA SEA Hela 89 POSGH Subframe Configuration RTE EE 90 Auto PDSCH Demodulation Turns automatic demodulation of the PDSCH on and off When you turn this feature on the software automatically detects the PDSCH resource allocation This is possible by analyzing the protocol information in the PDCCH or by analyzing the physical signal The software then writes the results into the PDSCH Configuration Table Configuring Downlink Signal Demodulation You can set the way the software identifies the PDSCH resource allocation with PDSCH Subframe Configuration Detection on page 90 When you turn off automatic demodulation of the PDSCH you have to configure the PDSCH manually In that case the software compares the demodulated LTE frame to the customized configuration If the PDSCH Subframe Configuration Detection is not turned off the software analyzes the frame only if both configurations are the same Remote command SENSe LTE DL DEMod AUTO on page 200 PDSCH Subframe Configuration Detection Selects the method of identifying the PDSCH resource allocation e Off Uses the user configuration to demodulate the PDSCH subframe If the user con figuration does not match the frame that was measured a bad EVM will result e PDCCH protocol Sets the PDSCH configuration according to the data in the protocol of the PDCCH DCls When you use
86. EPDCCH uses Parameters lt RBAssignment gt Example CONF DL EPDC RBAS 2 CONFigure LTE DL EPDCch SID lt SetID gt This command defines the EPDCCH set ID used to generate EPDCCH reference sym bols Parameters lt SetID gt Range 0 to 503 RST 0 Example CONF DL EPDC SID 10 Selects set ID 10 CONFigure LTE DL PBCH STAT lt State gt This command turns the PBCH on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example CONF DL PBCH STAT ON Activates the PBCH Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation CONFigure LTE DL PCFich STAT lt State gt This command turns the PCFICH on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example CONF DL PCF STAT ON Activates the PCFICH CONFigure LTE DL PHICh DURation lt Duration gt This command selects the PHICH duration Parameters lt Duration gt NORM Normal EXT Extended RST NORM Example CONF DL PHIC DUR NORM Selects normal PHICH duration CONFigure LTE DL PHICh NGParameter lt Ng gt This command selects the method that determines the number of PHICH groups ina subframe Parameters lt Ng gt NG1_6 NG1_2 NG1 NG2 NGCUSTOM Select NGCUSTOM to customize N You can then define the variable as you like with CONFigure LTE DL PHICh NOGRoups RST NG1 6 Example CONF DL PHIC NGP NG1 6 Sets N to 1 6 The number fo PHICH groups in the subframe depends on the number of resour
87. ERage iustitie mre Debt bttre re excu d d oa be d EEA 154 FETCh SUMMary GlIMBalance MAXimuUm nennt cut ru eren ttr nh inn e no Nariin 155 FETCRh SUMMary GIMBalance MINitmUutm canet rne tnr Rt Eben ter e tp ca eain 155 FETCh SUMMary GIMBalance AVERage riri natn i rp meriti tire hk aont XXE o Becr eR coats 155 FETCh SUMMary IQOFfset MAXIMUM i noon rn erret rr eine rete Rr hehe ee a ea eere EE gara 155 FETCRh SUMMary IQOFfset MINirm rn ctor ttn tare ten eter ter a ende 155 e en Eelere E EA Ge E NEE 155 FETCh SUMMary OSTP MAXIIUITI 2o errore re nepos nr the ra Esved ae A AAEE EEr IS aes 155 FETCh SUMMaty OSTP MINimU ln ecc ether enr prr e teer Rt Eee Le dp E xa ean 155 Le aen Ee EN EE E 155 FETCh SUMMary POWer MAXimum FETCRh SUMMaty POWher MINirnUtm nci ether err aei FETCh SUMMary POWer AVERage tereti atio Di rendere trek rep bs ti Xo EH Bc o i NR 156 FETCh SUMMary QUADerror MAXIIUITO sc eia t ea ren rea eh eo trente rrr apa e Pere T dE 156 FETCRh SUMMarty QUADerror MINImUlTI cci eit ren ro tr ane nr rte eir nere tr rn etna e xv Eae ENEE 156 FETCh SUMMary QUADertror AVERage incd ian eene tti reet pode ce ea Ra pA EK ENEE 156 FETCh SUMMary HR de dE 157 FEICh SUMMary RSSIEAVERage 21 eoe rct tienne e eec gege de 157 FETCh SUMMary RS TP MAXImUIm sss iicet cient n ru eine ri YE FRI eaae PE RR EE ERR FER ne TESTENE 157 FETCRh SUMMary RSTP MINIlDUtTI eer
88. ETEPDI DEModS PRDdala Io ed ceto ient trees 202 SENSe LTE DL DEMod EVMCalc Calculation This command selects the EVM calculation method for downlink signals Parameters Calculation TGPP 3GPP definition OTP Optimal timing position RST TGPP Example DL DEM EVMC TGPP Use 3GPP method SENSe LTE DL DEMod PRData Reference This command the type of reference data to calculate the EVM for the PDSCH 9 8 1 6 9 8 1 7 Parameters lt Reference gt Example AUTO Automatic i ALLO Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation dentification of reference data Reference data is 0 according to the test model definition DL DEM PRD ALLO Sets the reference data of the PDSCH to 0 Processing Demodulated Data SENSe EETEEDICDEMod GBSOCramblilig aee Repo aera nord Reo eR RR Reus 203 SENSe EL TE DL DEMod DACHannels essere nennen nnne nnne 203 SENSe LTE DL DEMod CBSCrambling State This command turns scrambling of coded bits for downlink signals on and off Parameters State Example ON OFF RST ON DL DEM CBSC ON Activate scrambling of coded bits SENSe LTE DL DEMod DACHannels lt State gt This command turns the decoding of all control channels on and off Parameters lt State gt Example ON OFF RST OFF DL DEM DACH ON Turns deco Configuring
89. FUNCtion POWer RESult CURRent lt ResultType gt This command queries the current results of the ACLR measurement or the total signal power level of the SEM measurement To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchroniza tion to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps Suffix lt m gt 1 Query parameters lt ResultType gt CPOW This parameter queries the signal power of the SEM measure ment Return values lt Result gt SEMResults Power level in dBm ACLRResults Relative power levels of the ACLR channels The number of return values depends on the number of transmission and adja cent channels The order of return values is e lt TXChannelPower gt is the power of the transmission channel in dBm e LowerAdjChannelPowers is the relative power of the lower adjacent channel in dB e lt UpperAdjChannelPower gt is the relative power of the upper adjacent channel in dB e 1stLowerAltChannelPower is the relative power of the first lower alternate channel in dB e lt 1stUpperAltChannelPower gt is the relative power of the first lower alternate channel in dB e lt nthLowerAltChannelPower gt is the relative power of a subse quent lower alternate channel in dB e nthUpperAltChannelPower is the relative power of a subse quent lower alternate channel in dB Example CALC1 MARK FUNC POW RES Returns the current ACL
90. Figure LTE DL MBSFn SUBFrame lt subframe gt PMCH STATe lt State gt This command turns the PMCH in an MBSFN subframe on and off Note that you first have to turn a subframe into a MBSFN subframe with CONFigure LTE DL MBSFn SUBFrame lt subframe gt STATe Parameters lt State gt ON OFF Example CONF DL MBSF SUBF2 PMCH STAT ON Turns the PMCH in the second subframe on CONFigure LTE DL MBSFn SUBFrame lt subframe gt STATe lt State gt This command turns a subframe into an MBSFN subframe Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF DL MBSF SUBF2 STAT ON Turns the second subframe into an MBSFN subframe Configuring the Software GON Les DEE 226 DiSblavlfWiNDow cnztStEl ect 226 9 10 Managing Files CONFigure PRESet Initiates a preset to the default state of the software and if connected to an analyzer also presets the analyzer Example CONF PRES Presets the software Usage Event DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SELect This command selects the measurement window Example DISP WIND2 SEL Selects screen B Usage Event Managing Files FORNADA TA E 226 MMEMOry LOAD RE e BEE 226 MMEMory LOADNOSS TAN KEE 227 MMEMern LOADS MOD DL x eripiet en Rue cans sevens EES 227 MMEMon STObRe D Modeetting esses eene nennen rent nnns 227 MMEMory Eet Aeren eege aad the alee cud 228 FORMat DATA lt Format gt This command specifies the data format for the data trans
91. Figure LTE DL SFNO CONFigure LTEE DL SUBFrame ssubframe AL Count 5 eterne ennt natn tnn nan CONFigure L TE DL SUBFrame ssubframe ALLoc allocation GAP seen CONFiourel LTE D GUBtrame subiramez AL Loc alocattonz POWer CONFigure LTET DL SUBFrame ssubframe ALLoc allocation PDbRECodimng AP CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame ssubframe ALLoc allocation PRECoding CBINdex CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt PRECoding CDD sesssss CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt PRECoding CLMapping eg CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame ssubframe ALLoc allocation PRECoding SCID CONFigure LTET DL SUBFrame ssubframe ALLoc allocation PRECoding S CHeme CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame ssubframe ALLoc allocation PSOFfset sss CONFigure L TE DL SUBFrame ssubframe ALLoc allocation RBCount esses CONFigure LTET DL SUBFrame ssubframe ALLoc allocation RBOFfset sss CONFigure L TET DL SUBFrame ssubframe ALLoc allocation UEID eene CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame ssubframe ALLoc allocation CW Cwnum MODulation 210 CONFig re LTE DUSYNC PPOWE EE 214 CONFigureEETEEDE SYNG SBPOMWXBLt n ec eeu ano tt E v t ee 2
92. G INPUT must remain open To use the R amp S FS Z11 as the trigger source you have to select it as the trigger source in the General Settings dialog box of the LTE measurement application For more information see Configuring the Trigger on page 81 Master Analyzer RF OUTPUT 1 RF INPUT NOISE SOURCE RF OUTPUT 2 TRIGGER INPUT RF OUTPUT 3 RF OUTPUT 4 TRIGGER OUTPUT Slave Analyzer 1 RF INPUT TRIGGER INPUT Slave Analyzer 1 FS Z11 Trigger Unit RF INPUT TRIG INPUT TRIG OUT 1 TRIGGER INPUT TRIG OUT 2 Slave Anal yzer 1 TRIG MANUAL TRIG OUT 3 RF INPUT NOISE SOURCE TRIG OUT 4 TRIGGER INPUT Cable Trigger Cable Trigger Optional DUT with TRIGGER OUTPUT Eech Cable RF MIMO Measurement Guide 8 4 2 MIMO Measurements with Oscilloscopes This part presents an approach to measure a MIMO signal transmitted on two or four antennas using the R amp S9RTO1044 digital oscilloscope 4 GHz 4 channels and the R amp S FS K102 103PC LTE MIMO downlink uplink PC software This has multiple advantages e Only one measurement instrument is required This not only reduces the number of test instruments but also simplifies the test setup and cabling no reference oscilla tor and trigger cabling no additional hardware for synchronization required like the R amp S 9FS Z11 e The measurement time is reduced For measuring LTE signals with the RTO it has to be equipped with the options R amp S RTO B4 and R amp S9RTO K11 The har
93. ICH DURATION 22 0 0 chcecaceestsasecnedecgeeteedecateedensetaaabesesdvareaeeeee 220 CONFigure L TEEDL PHIGh NGParameter ioo eene ces an NEEN EEN 220 GONFigurebETEEDEPBOOR FORMll 5 2 rette s ape poete OE Reha tea aont 220 een UE RR EI eler e d IU ioiai anaa iaaa a iaaa ia 221 CONFigure tL NEE leet Oe 221 GONFig rep E TEEDEIPDOOhINOPED 1 123221 212222 it ae EA araa 221 EE L DEE E aale Ke OC 221 CONFigure L TED PCEieh PB OWer saeaeaaaaaaaededeeseteseeesereeeees 222 GONFiguire L TEEDIE PHIGhIPOWGr 221a rua cuiai o cnt a a ai 222 GONFigureEETEEDEIPECOh POWMQGE cuentan ENEE 222 CONFigure L TE DL EPDCch LOCalized State This command turns localized transmission of the EPDCCH on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example CONF DL EPDC LOC OFF Turns on distributed transmission of the EPDCCH Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation CONFigure LTE DL EPDCch NPRB lt NofPRBPairs gt This command selects the number of resource blocks that the EPDCCH PRB set uses Parameters lt NofPRBPairs gt MNEM ASEL CONFigure LTE DL EPDCch POWer lt Power gt This command defines the relative power of the EPDCCH Parameters lt Power gt lt numeric value gt RST 0 dB Default unit DB Example CONF DL EPDC POW 0 5 Sets the relative power to 0 5 dB CONFigure LTE DL EPDCch RBASsign lt RBAssignment gt This command defines the resource blocks that the
94. If on the software evaluates the on periods of an LTE TDD signal only The software determines the location and length of the on period from the TDD UL DL Allocations and the Configuration of the Special Subframe Note that the automatic cyclic prefix mode detection is not supported if you have turned on Auto Gating In that case you have to select the cyclic prefix mode manually Auto gating is available for TDD measurements in combination with an external or IF power trigger If you are using an external trigger the DUT has to send an LTE frame trigger Remote command SENSe SWEep EGATe AUTO on page 195 4 5 Advanced Settings The advanced settings contain settings to configure the signal input and some global measurement analysis settings You can find the advanced settings in the General Settings dialog box LER Cons WO Data ce Ee Ee ive sedis 84 Configuring the Baseband Inpult e tenente enne Rea ER Re 85 e Using Advanced Input Gettings nnne 86 e Configuring the Digital V O Ip 1r eerte aaas 86 e Global d Tute E 87 e Mapping Antenna Porte 88 4 5 1 Controlling UO Data The I Q settings contain settings that control the UO data flow 4 5 2 Advanced Settings The I Q settings are part of the Advanced tab of the General Settings dialog box General Analyzer Config MIMO Setup Trigger Spectrum Advanced IQ Settings Swap IQ T File Source Offset Os Se AE EE 85 al
95. LL Example CONF DL SYNC ANT ALL All antennas are used to transmit the P SYNC and S SYNC CONFigure LTE DL SYNC PPOWer lt Power gt This command defines the relative power of the P SYNC Parameters lt Power gt lt numeric value gt RST 0 dB Default unit DB Example CONF DL SYNC PPOW 0 5 Sets a relative power of 0 5 dB CONFigure LTE DL SYNC SPOWer lt Power gt This command defines the relative power of the S SYNC Parameters lt Power gt lt numeric value gt RST 0 dB Default unit DB Example CONF DL SYNC SPOW 0 5 Sets a relative power of 0 5 dB Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation 9 8 3 2 Configuring the Reference Signal CONFigure Ee RE ET Oe 215 CONFigure LTE DL REFSig POWer lt Power gt This command defines the relative power of the reference signal Parameters lt Power gt lt numeric value gt RST 0 dB Default unit DB Example CONF DL REFS POW 1 2 Sets a relative power of 1 2 dB 9 8 3 3 Configuring the Positioning Reference Signal GCONFigure PETE DIGPRSSI STA E 215 CON Le te REI NEE 215 GONFigure L TEEDLIPRSS Gl iioii Lii e seeccrerti AANEREN d e 215 EE Lee Die RTE 216 CONFiourelLTELDLPRGG POwWer enne nennen nenne rennen nitens 216 CON Figure E TEEDESPNQO EE 216 CONFigure L TE DL PRSS STATe State This command turns the positioning reference signal on and off Parameters State ON OFF Example CONF
96. M DSSF MAXimum RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMary EVM DSSF AVERage RESult This command queries the results of the EVM limit check of all PDSCH resource ele ments with a 64QAM modulation Return values lt LimitCheck gt The type of limit average or maximum that is queried depends on the last syntax element FAILED Limit check has failed PASSED Limit check has passed NOTEVALUATED Limits have not been evaluated Example CALC LIM SUMM EVM DSSF RES Queries the limit check Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMary EVM DSST MAXimum RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMary EVM DSST AVERage RESult This command queries the results of the EVM limit check of all PDSCH resource ele ments with a 16QAM modulation Return values lt LimitCheck gt The type of limit average or maximum that is queried depends on the last syntax element FAILED Limit check has failed PASSED Limit check has passed NOTEVALUATED Limits have not been evaluated Example CALC LIM SUMM EVM DSST RES Queries the limit check Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMary EVM PCHannel MAXimum RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMary EVM PCHannel AVERage RESult This command queries the results of the EVM limit check of all physical channel resource elements Remote Commands to Read Trace Data Return values lt LimitCheck gt The type of limit aver
97. Measurements 9 7 4 1 e Configuring SEM and ACLR Measurements esses 194 Configuring SEM and ACLR Measurements SENSeEPOWer SEM CATSGgOL eege EES tate YE NEEN ER VAR OR EEN ERAN 194 SENSe POWer SEM CHBS AMPower AUTO esses nennen rere 194 SENS Ge eer ENTREE e ET DEE 195 SENSe POWerNCORIeCHO DEE 195 SENSe SWESp EGATS ALB TO EE 195 SENSe POWer SEM CATegory lt Category gt This command selects the SEM limit category as defined in 3GPP TS 36 104 Parameters lt Category gt A Category A Wide Area base station Bi Category B Opt 1 Wide Area base station B2 Category B Opt 2 Wide Area base station HOME Home base station LARE Local Area base station MED Medium Range base station RST A Example POW GEM CAT B Selects SEM category B SENSe POWer SEM CHBS AMPower AUTO lt State gt This command turn automatic detection of the TX channel power on and off The command is available for measurements on Medium Range base stations When you turn it off you can define the TX channel power manually with SENSe POWer SEM CHBS AMPower Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example POW SEM CHBS AMP AUTO ON Turns on automatic detection of the TX channel power Remote Commands to Configure General Settings SENSe POWer ACHannel AACHannel lt Channel gt This command selects the assumed adjacent channel carrier for ACLR
98. NFigure LTE DL MBSFn SUBFrame lt subframe gt PMCH STATE 0 0 cece ee ecee cece teneeeneeeeeetneeeeeeenes 225 CONFigure L TET DL MBSFn SUBFrame ssubframe STATe sse 225 GONFigurerETEEDLE MIMO GROSSt alk 2 eher ra rt nene riot bet puente dre iate et eere teas 203 GONFigureELTEEDLE PBGEEPQONWEAT ttr ett rre erra err rrt nire rr rr noua 221 GONFigure ETEEDEPBGEESTAT iecit rer Re in ted bed SAS CONFigure LTE DL PCFich POWer CONFigureE NR EU er ee RE EE GONFigu rerE TEEDEPBC Ch F OORMal oii odit ipai nee erc tetuer SSES 220 GONFigureEETETDEPDGQGCHh INOPD prier rri tercer neta ee nesta ec teet n E i epar ad 221 CONFigureE NR EU lee Ee TE 222 CONFig re LTE DL PDSCH EE 223 CONFig rel REENERT EE 220 CONFigureEETETFDE PEICRMMITM 22 tpi uci Rt pete teeth estet erae ire egre ns 221 GONFigure E TEEDE PEIORINGPAFambelter uode rr potter a eerte ebur Y Pest Re Eden 220 GONFigureE ETETDEPEICHINOGROUDS cotta totae rir E Yr e cicer rv cene erie 221 CONFigureEETETEDEPEHICHUBPQNWSAE ctn gut tate tta itc ree pn e tener tet decet pec En tt 222 CONFigure LTE DL PRSS BW CONFigu reEETETDEPRSS Gl EE CONFigureE E TEEBEPRSS NBRS c centeno tret eg tene estt ne espe eee pene bus GONFigu rerE TEEDEPRSS POWAOE 1 tta tette etaient i aa a shay regir inen Vener en nt dob aes EES UR E UE EN KEE CONFigureEETETFDE PSOFfSSl E GONFig rerETEEDEREESiIgi POWE ningen a a a o ea a E SE CON
99. NFigureEETEEDEF CO Scot PEG ele 207 CONFgurel L TEDL OCC PLO PUD DEE 207 FETCh CO ccl EPEC OIDGLEOUD 2 11 roast eines etse ennt neta ia cator ev tere ede 207 FETON COSCE PLC PUD EE 208 CONFigure LTE DL CC lt cci gt PLC CID lt Cellld gt This command defines the cell ID Parameters lt Cellld gt AUTO Automatically defines the cell ID lt numeric value gt Number of the cell ID Range 0 to 503 Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation Example CONF NOCC 2 CONF DL CCI PLC CID 12 CONF DL CC2 PLC CID 15 Selects 2 carriers and defines a cell ID for each one CONFigure LTE DL CC lt cci gt PLC CIDGroup lt GroupNumber gt This command selects the cell ID group for downlink signals Parameters lt GroupNumber gt AUTO Automatic selection 0 167 Manual selection RST AUTO Example CONF DL PLC CIDG 134 Cell identity group number 134 is selected CONF DL PLC CIDG AUTO Automatic cell identity group detection is selected CONFigure LTE DL CC lt cci gt PLC PLID Identity This command defines the physical layer cell identity for ownlink signals Parameters lt Identity gt AUTO Automatic selection 0 2 Manual selection RST AUTO Example CONF DL PLC PLID 1 Selects physical layer cell ID 2 FETCh CC lt cci gt PLC CIDGroup This command queries the cell identit
100. O Measurements with OSCIIIOSCOPES cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteessntsnateees 135 8 5 Calibrating Beamforming Measurements eene 136 8 6 Performing Time Alignment Measurements eene 138 8 7 Performing Transmit On Off Power Measurements eere 140 9 Remote CCN RIN cae see rere eterne pese danno nn isSnuEnu Eu rEREEE 142 9 1 Overview of Remote Command Suffixes eene 142 User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 5 9 2 INO MUCHO 143 9 2 1 Long and Short Fom nennen enne EAEE EANTA EENE UERS S 143 9 2 2 Numeric SUES enne entren neri ren nnns einen 144 9 2 3 Optional KeyWord S nnne inai Pedia a U EEE TETE nennen 144 9 24 Vertical Stroke DEE 144 9 2 9 SCPI Parameters oirinn EENS AAR Oei SS 145 9 3 Remote Commands to Select a Result Display esee 147 9 4 Remote Commands to Perform Measurements esee 148 9 5 Remote Commands to Read Numeric Results esee 151 9 6 Remote Commands to Read Trace Data eeeseeneeeeeenneennnn 158 9 6 1 Using the TRACe DATA Commande 158 9 6 2 Reading Out Limit Check Results 173 9 7 Remote Commands to Configure General Settings 181 9 7 1 Remote Commands for General Gettngs 181 9 7 2 Configuring MIMO Measu
101. OOPoOwWer CAGGEeGgGallOh e eene rp eere en eae e eiu nar EE EEN 189 SENSe ETETE OOPower FREQU ency HIGHlet 1t ote et ttt tuae te rent 189 SENSe E TEE OOPower FREQuency LOWer rrr ern tr ern CAE Taia 190 SENSe LTE OOPower NCORrection SENSe E NEE SENSe E LE TEESUBFrame SEL6cCtL rtr rerit er n rere th nre ek recen E neas e Ael D e CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ACHannel RESUIt eese nennen 173 CALOCulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate RESUIt eese nennen 174 GAL Culatesp bMMitsks OOPower OF FPOWOI uci corriere tk tenebit ee rbi ey eee prego IR eH e ke eU e ee 175 CALOCulate n LIMit k OOPower TRANSient 476 CALOCulate n LIMit k SUMMary EVM DSQP MAXimum RESUIt eese 177 CALOCulate n LIMit k SUMMary EVM DSQP AVERage RESUIE esee 177 CALOCulate n LIMit k SUMMary EVM DSSF MAXimum RESUIt esee 178 CALOCulate n LIMit k SUMMary EVM DSSF AVERage RESUIt sees 178 CALCulate n LIMit k SUMMary EVM DSST MAXimum RESUIt sese 178 CAL Culate nzLUlMitck GUMMan EVMDGGSTIAVERaoel RE Gut 178 CALCulate n LIMit k SUMMary EVM PCHannel MAXimum RESUIt eese 178 CALCulate n LIMit k SUMMary EVM PCHannel AVERa
102. OSCH PB acirrada isina sk tena na 223 CONFigure LTE DL PDSCh PB lt PDSChPB gt This command selects the PDSCH power ratio Note that the power ratio depends on the number of antennas in the system Parameters lt PDSChPB gt Numeric value that defines PDSCH P_B which defines the power ratio in dB 0 1 2 3 See PDSCH Power Ratio for an overview of resulting power ratios RAT1 Ratio 1 regardless of the number of antennas Example CONF DL PDSC PB 3 Selects the PDSCH P B 3 9 8 4 Remote Commands for MBSFN Settings This chapter contains remote commands necessary to include an MBSFN in the test setup For more information see chapter 5 4 Defining MBSFN Characteristics on page 116 WWIBSFINSSOUINGS 2s orte rtt t rete ie e tee tbt ire eed ia rne 224 e MBSFN Subframe Confiuration eese cerea tenen ne natant tian nena 225 9 8 4 1 Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation MBSFN Settings GONFigurebETEEDIOMBSETIATI e eranaeaeteaeceeniaetens 224 CONFigure L TED MBSEn AINMRL tence eee nennen nnne nen nn nennen nennen 224 EENHEETEN cad 224 GONFigure L TEE DLIMBSPniSTA Te ee 1i triti resort ite ova ak oc qs PL AA 224 CONFigure LTE DL MBSFn Al ID Configuration Defines the ID of an MBFSN area Parameters Configuration Range 0 to 255 Example CONF DL MBSF AI ID 2 Defines an area for the multimedia broadcast network CONFigure LTE DL MBSFn Al NMRL Conf
103. PVT OOP Power Spectrum SPEC PSPE Power vs RB PDSCH SPEC PVRP Power vs RB RS SPEC PVRR Power vs Symbol x Carrier SPEC PVSC Spectrum Flatness SPEC FLAT Signal Flow STAT SFLO Spectrum Emission Mask SPEC SEM Time Alignment Error PVT ITAER UE RS Weights Magnitude BEAM URWM UE RS Weights Phase BEAM URWP UE RS Weights Difference Magnitude BEAM URMD UE RS Weights Difference Phase BEAM URPD DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TABLe State This command turns the result summary on and off Parameters State ON Turns the result summary on and removes all graphical results from the screen OFF Turns the result summary off and restores the graphical results that were previously set Example DISP TABL OFF Turns the result summary off Remote Commands to Perform Measurements CALibraliogn Ge Le EE 149 CALibration PHASeILOAD 2 1er dete neec ictu c cete vine avdeesecesovevadeeegs eset 149 INITlatel IMMedatel nennen nennen nnntrn rere tnnt nh nn nh nnne nennen nnns 149 IND TIG SEP EE 149 Zelt ud mdi ier o Pando rit casio b dc eben 150 SENSE PLT EROOP Owe el e EE 150 CONFigure LTE DL CONS LOCation cccccceecececeeeneeeaeaeaeaeneneeeeceeeneneneneneneseaeaeeaeaees 150 CONPiguNne PETE DIG BR EE 150 Remote Commands to Perform Measurements CALibration PHASe GENerate lt Path gt This command generates calibration data for beamforming measurements and saves it to a file Setting parame
104. Power vs RB PDSCH result display the command returns one value for each resource block of the PDSCH that has been analyzed lt absolute power gt The unit is always dBm The following parameters are supported TRACE1 Returns the average power over all subframes TRACE2 Returns the minimum power found over all subframes If you are analyzing a partic ular subframe it returns nothing TRACE3 Returns the maximum power found over all subframes If you are analyzing a par ticular subframe it returns nothing Power vs Symbol x Carrier For the Power vs Symbol x Carrier the command returns one value for each resource element P Symbol 0 Carrier 1 lt P Symbol 0 Carrier n gt P Symbol 1 Carrier 1 P Symbol 1 Carrier n lt P Symbol n Carrier 1 gt lt P Symbol n Carrier n gt with P Power of a resource element The unit is always dBm Resource elements that are unused return NAN The following parameters are supported TRACE1 Spectrum Emission Mask For the SEM measurement the number and type of returns values depend on the parameter TRACE1 9 6 1 28 9 6 1 29 9 6 1 30 Remote Commands to Read Trace Data Returns one value for each trace point lt absolute power gt The unit is always dBm e LIST Returns the contents of the SEM table For every frequency in the spectrum emis sion mask it returns nine values lt index gt lt start frequ
105. R amp S9FS K100 102 104PC R amp S9FSV K100 102 104 R amp S9FSQ K100 102 104 EUTRA LTE Downlink PC Software User Manual INTIMA A 1308 9029 42 17 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ This manual covers the following products e R amp S FSQ K100 1308 9006 02 e R amp S FSQ K102 1309 9000 02 e R amp S9FSQ K104 1309 9422 02 e R amp S FSV K100 1310 9051 02 e R amp S FSV K102 1310 9151 02 R amp S FSV K104 1309 9774 02 e R amp S9FS K100PC 1309 9916 02 e R amp S9FS K102PC 1309 9939 02 e R amp S9FS K104PC 1309 9951 02 The R amp S FS K10xPC versions are available for the following spectrum and signal analyzers and oscillo scopes e R amp S FSG R amp S FSQ e R amp S FSV e R amp S9FSVR e R amp S FSW e R amp S RTO The contents of the manual correspond to version 3 40 or higher 2014 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG M hldorfstr 15 81671 M nchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S FS K100 K102 K104 is abbreviated as R amp S FS K100 K102 K104 Contents WT e tB 7 1 4 Requirements for UMTS Long Term Evolution eene 7 1
106. R measurement provides information about the power in the adjacent channels as well as the leakage into these adjacent channels The software shows two traces a yellow one T1 and a green one T2 The yellow trace is the representation of the signal data measured with a resolution bandwidth RBW of 1 MHz The green trace is the data measured with a RBW of 100 kHz The x axis represents the frequency with a frequency span that relates to the specified EUTRA LTE channel and adjacent channel bandwidths On the y axis the power is plotted in dBm By default the ACLR settings are based on the selected LTE Channel Bandwidth You can change the assumed adjacent channel carrier type and the Noise Correction Adjacent Channel Power Assumed Adj Channel Carrier EUTRAsame DA RBW 11 1 MH2 72 100 kHz Noise Correction FF SWT 500 0 ms Category Category A 335 1000 1005 1010 1020 Frequency MHz The software provides a relative and an absolute ACLR measurement mode that you can select with the ACLR REL ABS softkey e Incase of the relative measurement mode the power for the TX channel is an absolute value in dBm The power of the adjacent channels are values relative to the power of the TX channel e Incase of the absolute measurement mode the power for both TX and adjacent channels are absolute values in dBm In addition the ACLR measurement results are also tested against the limits defined by 3GPP In the diagram the limits are r
107. R measurement results Usage Query only CALCulate n LIMit k OOPower OFFPower This command queries the results of the limit check in the Off periods of On Off Power measurements 9 6 2 2 Remote Commands to Read Trace Data Return values lt OOPResults gt Returns one value for every Off period PASSED Limit check has passed FAILED Limit check has failed Example CALC LIM OOP OFFP Queries the results for the limit check during the signal Off peri ods Usage Query only CALCulate n LIMit k OOPower TRANsient Result This command queries the results of the limit check during the transient periods of the On Off power measurement Query parameters Result ALL Queries the overall limit check results FALLing Queries the limit check results of falling transients RISing Queries the limit check results of rising transients Return values lt OOPResults gt Returns one value for every Off period PASSED Limit check has passed FAILED Limit check has failed Example CALC LIM O0OP TRAN RIS Queries the limit check of rising transients Usage Query only Checking Limits for Numerical Result Display CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMary EVM ALL MAXimum RE Gu 177 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMary EVM ALL AVERage RESUuIt ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 177 CALOCulate n LIMit k SUMMary EVM DSQP MAXimum RESUIt
108. RelPOUNL ie nte ens eet tree EIS ized Te DEC E Pedo tes DE Poe DESDE ELE LEE EDU PEE EC ERE ES 114 PDCCH Format Defines the format of the PDCCH physical downlink control channel Note that PDCCH format 1 is not defined in the standard This format corresponds to the transmission of one PDCCH on all available resource element groups As a special case for this PDCCH format the center of the constellation diagram is treated as a valid constellation point Remote command CONFigure LTE DL PDCCh FORMat on page 220 Number of PDCCHs Sets the number of physical downlink control channels This parameter is available if the PDCCH format is 1 Remote command CONFigure LTE DL PDCCh NOPD on page 221 PDCCH Rel Power Defines the power of the PDCCH relative to the reference signal Remote command CONFigure LTE DL PDCCh POWer on page 222 Configuring the EPDCCH The enhanced physical downlink control channel EPDCCH carries the downlink con trol information Compared to the PDCCH the EPDCCH uses resource blocks nor mally reserved for the PDSCH 0 Shared resource blocks of PDSCH and EPDCCH PDSCH allocations overwrite the EPDCCH if they occupy the same resource blocks The EPDCCH is always transmitted in an EPDCCH PRB set For each cell and user you can define one or two EPDCCH PRB sets A EPDCCH PRB set is made up out of two or more resource blocks that are combined logically Note that you have to
109. Remote command CONFigure LTE DL PHICh NGParameter on page 220 PHICH Number of Groups Sets the number of PHICH groups contained in a subframe To select a number of groups you have to set the PHICH N g to Custom Remote command CONFigure LTE DL PHICh NOGRoups on page 221 PHICH Rel Power Defines the power of all PHICHs in a PHICH group relative to the reference signal The software measures a separate relative power for each PHICH if Boosting Estima tion is on In that case the Rel Power dB result in the Allocation Summary stays empty because it refers to the common relative power for all PHICHs The relative powers for each PHICH in the group are displayed in the Channel Decoder Results Note that the PHICH power results are quantized to 1 dB steps based on the PHICH relative power because only a few PHICH symbols are available for boosting estima tion Example The PHICH Rel Power is 3 01 dB In that case possible PHICH boostings are 4 01 dB 3 01 dB 2 01 dB etc Remote command CONFigure LTE DL PHICh POWer on page 222 5 3 6 4 Configuring the PDCCH The physical downlink control channel PDCCH carries the downlink control informa tion for example the information about the PDSCH resource allocation 5 3 6 5 Defining Advanced Signal Characteristics You can define several specific parameters for the PDCCH PN Ce EE 114 NumberoppP DOO IS nete rte onere er ete me Per eon ete 114 PDOCOH
110. SCH is either QPSK 16QAM 64QAM or 256QAM Remote command CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt CW Cwnum MODulation on page 210 Enhanced Settings Opens a dialog box to configure MIMO functionality For more information see chapter 5 2 4 2 Enhanced Settings on page 102 VRB Gap Turns the use of virtual resource blocks VRB on and off The standard defines two types of VRBs Localized VRBs and distributed VRBs While localized VRBs have a direct mapping to the PRBs distributed VRBs result in a better frequency diversity Three values of VRB gap are allowed e O Localized VRBs are used e 41 Distributed VRBs are used and the first gap is applied e 2 Distributed VRBs are used and the second gap is applied for channel band widths gt 50 resource blocks The second gap has a smaller size compared to the first gap If on the VRB Gap determines the distribution and mapping of the VRB pairs to the physical resource blocks PRB pairs The distribution of the VRBs is performed in a way that consecutive VRBs are spread over the frequencies and are not mapped to PRBs whose frequencies are next to each other Each VRB pair is split into two parts which results in a fre quency gap between the two VRB parts This method corresponds to frequency hopping on a slot basis The information whether localized or distributed VRBs are applied is carried in the PDCCH The DCI formats 1A 1B and
111. Selecting the result display C Querying results Channel Decoder Results The Channel Decoder result display is a numerical result display that shows the char acteristics of various channels for a particular subframe Protocol information of the PBCH PCFICH and PHICH Information about the DCIs in the PDCCH Decoded bitstream for each PDCCH Decoded bitstream for each PDSCH The size of the table thus depends on the number of subframes in the signal Note that a complete set of results for the control channels is available only under cer tain circumstances e The Ong control channel has to be present and enabled see ter 5 h on page 110 e Each channel must have a senan SES see list below Channel Decoder Results Allocation nt Bandwidth 10 MHz PHICH normal duration PHICH resource 1 6 PCFICH 2 symbols for PDCCH PHICH ACK 1 HACK 0 Rel Power dB 0 00 3 01 3 01 24 01 00 0 0 0 3 01 22 01 O1 3 01 21 01 0 0 0 3 01 701 3 011 0 Di 3 01 3 01 23 01 eu PCFICH 2 symbols for PDCCH For each channel the table shows a different set of values e PBCH For the PBCH the Channel Decoder provides the following results User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 58 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays the MIMO configuration of the DUT 1 2 or 4 TX antennas the Transmission bandwidth the Duration of the PHICH normal or
112. The DCI contains infor mation about the resource assignment for the UEs The following DCI formats are supported 0 1 1A 1B 1C 2 2A 2C 2D 3 3A The DCI format is determined by the length of the DCI Because they have the same length the Channel Decoder is not able to distinguish formats 0 3 and 3A Note that a DCI that consist of only zero bits cannot be decoded PDCCH format used to transmit the DCI CCE Offset The CCE Offset represents the position of the current DCI in the PDCCH bit stream Rel Power Relative power ofthe corresponding PDCCH Results for the PDCCH can only be determined if the PDSCH subframe configura tion is detected by the PDCCH Protocol or if automatic decoding of all control channels is turned on e PDSCH For each decoded PDSCH allocation there is a PDCCH DCI The DCI contains parameters that are required for the decoding process If the channel could be decoded successfully the result display shows the bit stream for each codeword User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 59 3 7 Measuring Beamforming If the Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC fails the result display shows an error mes sage instead Results for the PDSCH can only be determined if the PDSCH subframe configura tion is detected by the PDCCH Protocol or if automatic decoding of all control channels is turned on Remote command Selecting the result display CALCulate lt screenid gt FEED STAT CDR Querying results TRACe DATA
113. The unit degree The following parameters are supported TRACE1 Returns the phase of the measured weights of the reference signal RS carriers over one subframe Channel Decoder Results For the Channel Decoder Results the number and type of return values depend on the parameter PBCH Returns the results for the PBCH if PBCH decoding or CRC check was success ful The results are made up out of six values lt subframe gt lt of antennas gt lt system bandwidth gt lt frame gt lt PHICH duration gt lt PHICH resource gt The unit for system bandwidth is Hz All other values have no unit The PHICH duration and PHICH resource are encoded For the code assignment see chapter 9 6 1 30 Return Value Codes on page 170 If PBCH decoding was not successful the command returns NAN PCFICH Returns the results for the PCFICH The results are made up out of two parame ters lt subframe gt number of symbols for PDCCH gt The values have no unit PHICH Returns the results for the PHICH The results are made up out of three values for each line of the table lt subframe gt ACK NACK relative power The unit for relative power is dB All other values have no unit The lt ACK NACK gt is encoded For the code assignment see chapter 9 6 1 30 Return Value Codes on page 170 PDCCH Returns the results for the PDCCH The results are made up out of seven values for each line of the tab
114. UATED Limits have not been evaluated Example CALC LIM SUMM QUAD RES Queries the limit check Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMary SERRor MAXimum RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMary SERRor AVERage RESult This command queries the results of the sampling error limit check Return values lt LimitCheck gt The type of limit average or maximum that is queried depends on the last syntax element FAILED Limit check has failed PASSED Limit check has passed NOTEVALUATED Limits have not been evaluated Example CALC LIM SUMM SERR RES Queries the limit check Usage Query only 9 7 Remote Commands to Configure General Settings e Remote Commands for General Gettings 181 e Configuring MIMO Measurement Getupe eene 190 e Using a Le itt east ie lata eda a aaa 192 e Configuring Spectrum Measurements esses enne enne 194 e Remote Commands for Advanced Gettings 196 9 7 1 Remote Commands for General Settings This chapter contains remote control commands necessary to control the general mea surement settings 9 7 1 1 Remote Commands to Configure General Settings For more information see chapter 4 1 Configuring the Measurement on page 68 e Defining General Signal Characteristics 182 e Selecting the Input SOM GO iter rr Eee D e ce tt ee te een d te 183 Contiguiing the Input Level EE 183 e Configuring the Data Capture 185 e Configuring Measurem
115. aai 191 CONFigure ACONfig lt instrument gt ADDRess Address This command defines the network address of an analyzer or oscilloscope in the test setup Remote Commands to Configure General Settings Parameters lt Address gt String containing the address of the analyzer Connections are possible via TCP IP or GPIB Depending on the type of connection the string has the following syntax GPIB board lt PrimaryAddress gt lt SecondaryAddress gt INSTR TCPIP board lt HostAddress gt lt LANDeviceName gt INSTR Elements in square brackets are optional Example CONF ACON ADDR TCPIP 192 168 0 1 Defines a TCP IP connection for the first analyzer in the test setup CONF ACON ADDR GPIB 28 Defines a GPIB connection for the first analyzer in the test setup CONFigure ACONfig lt instrument gt IC Sequence lt ICSequence gt This command defines the sequence in which the oscilloscope channels are accessed Parameters lt ICSequence gt String containing a sequence of four numbers between 1 and 4 Each number represents an input channel Example CONF ACON ICS 1 3 2 4 Defines the sequence for an oscilloscope with four channels The channels are subsequently accessed in the order 1 gt 3 gt 2 2 4 CONFigure ACONfig lt instrument gt NCHannels lt NCHannels gt This command defines the number of oscilloscope channels you want to use Parameters lt NCHannels gt 1 2 3 4 The maximum n
116. ab Note that a particular UO data stream may still contain information on several antenna ports Antenna Port Selection In the Antenna Selection dropdown menu gt General tab the software allows you to select the antenna ports whose results are shown Antenna port selection is possible only after the UO data has been already captured The contents of the dropdown menu depend on several parameters the MIMO configuration 1 2 or 4 antenna the antenna selected for analysis the number of input channels the state of the CSI reference signal the state of the positioning reference signal the PDSCH MIMO precoding The mapping of antenna ports to antenna is done by the software Antennas that trans mit a cell specific reference signal APO AP3 are labeled Tx1 to Tx4 All other antennas are labeled Tx BF beamforming Each menu item covers one or more antenna ports The antenna ports are added and removed by the following rules e Antenna Port 0 3 APO AP3 Available for analysis of antennas 1 to 4 e Antenna Port 4 AP4 Analysis currently not supported e Antenna Port 5 AP5 Available for analysis of the UE specific reference signals e Antenna Port 6 AP6 Available for analysis if the Positioning Reference Signal is present e Antenna Port 7 14 AP7 AP14 Available for analysis of UE specific references e Antenna Port 15 22 AP15 AP22 Available for analysis if the CSI Reference Signal is present Rem
117. age or maximum that is queried depends on the last syntax element FAILED Limit check has failed PASSED Limit check has passed NOTEVALUATED Limits have not been evaluated Example CALC LIM SUMM EVM PCH RES Queries the limit check Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMary EVM PSIGnal MAXimum RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMary EVM PSIGnal AVERage RESult This command queries the results of the EVM limit check of all physical signal resource elements Return values lt LimitCheck gt The type of limit average or maximum that is queried depends on the last syntax element FAILED Limit check has failed PASSED Limit check has passed NOTEVALUATED Limits have not been evaluated Example CALC LIM SUMM EVM PSIG RES Queries the limit check Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMary FERRor MAXimum RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMary FERRor AVERage RESult This command queries the result of the frequency error limit check Return values lt LimitCheck gt The type of limit average or maximum that is queried depends on the last syntax element FAILED Limit check has failed PASSED Limit check has passed NOTEVALUATED Limits have not been evaluated Remote Commands to Read Trace Data Example CALC LIM SUMM SERR RES Queries the limit check Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMar
118. al Antenna 2 e 7 Reference Signal Antenna 3 e 8 Reference Signal Antenna 4 e 9 PCFICH e 10 PHICH e 11 PDCCH e 12 PBCH e 13 PMCH e 14 Positioning Reference Signal e 15 CSI Reference Signal Port 15 and 16 e 16 CSI Reference Signal Port 17 and 18 e 17 CSI Reference Signal Port 19 and 20 e 18 CSI Reference Signal Port 21 and 22 e 19 EPDCCH e 20 EPDCCH DMRS1 e 21 EPDCCH DMRS2 e 22 PMCH Reference Signal e 1xxxxx UE Reference Signal Port 5 e 2xxxxx UE Reference Signal 1 Port 7 8 11 12 e 3xxxxx UE Reference Signal 2 Port 9 10 13 14 signals with more than 2 lay ers Note xxxxx is a placeholder for the ID of the PDSCH If the PDSCH has for example the ID 22 the return value would be 100022 200022 or 300022 depending on the configuration lt codeword gt Represents the codeword of an allocation The range is 0 6 e 0 1 1 e 1 1 2 e 2 2 2 e 3 1 4 e 4 2 4 e 5 3 4 Remote Commands to Read Trace Data e 6 4 4 DCI format Represents the DCI format The value is a number in the range 0 103 e 0Q DCI format 0 e 10 DCI format 1 e 11 DCI format 1A e 12 DCI format 1B e 13 DCIformat 1C e 14 DCI format 1D e 20 DCI format 2 e 21 DCI format 2A e 22 DCI format 2B e 23 DCI format 2C e 24 DCI format 2D e 30 DCI format 3 e 31 DCI format A e 103 DCI format 0 3 3A lt modulation gt Represents the modulation
119. al TDD subframe configuration Parameters lt Configuration gt Example lt numeric value gt Numeric value that defines the subframe configuration Subframe configurations 7 and 8 are only available if the cyclic prefix is normal Range 0 to 8 RST 0 Single carrier measurements CONF DL CYCP NORM CONF DL TDD SPSC 7 Selects subframe configuration 7 available only with a normal cyclic prefix 9 8 2 2 Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation Example Carrier aggregation measurements CONF DL CC1 TDD SPSC 2 Selects special subframe configuration 2 for the first carrier FETCh CC lt cci gt CYCPrefix This command queries the cyclic prefix type that has been detected Return values lt PrefixType gt The command returns 1 if no valid result has been detected yet NORM Normal cyclic prefix length detected EXT Extended cyclic prefix length detected Example FETC CYCP Returns the current cyclic prefix length type Usage Query only FETCh CC lt cci gt 0SUBcarriers This command queries the number of occupied carriers as shown in the Signal Char acteristics dialog box Return values lt Subcarriers gt Number of occupied subcarriers Example FETC OSUB Queries the number of occupied carriers Usage Query only Configuring the Physical Layer Cell Identity GONFiguire L TEP DL CC lt c gt PLC C Di ia dicc eco na ctun etd teet iude kn NEEN 206 GO
120. an display it in full screen or split screen mode The result display is separated in a header that shows the title etc and the diagram area that show the actual results 3 Status bar The status bar contains information about the current status of the measurement and the software 4 Hotkeys Hotkeys contain functionality to control the measurement process 5 Softkeys Softkeys contain functionality to configure and select measurement functions 6 Hardkeys Hardkeys open new softkey menus The status bar The status bar is located at the bottom of the display It shows the current measure ment status and its progress in a running measurement The status bar also shows warning and error messages Error messages are generally highlighted Display of measurement settings The header table above the result displays shows information on hardware and mea surement settings Sync State Capture Time Frame The header table includes the following information e Freq The analyzer RF frequency e Mode Link direction duplexing cyclic prefix and maximum number of physical resource blocks PRBs signal bandwidth e CP Cell Grp ID Shows the cell identity information e Sync State The following synchronization states may occur OK The synchronization was successful FAIL C The cyclic prefix correlation failed FAIL P The P SYNC correlation failed FAIL S The S SYNC correlation failed Any combination o
121. ant You can combine allocations by assigning the same number more than once Combin ing allocations assigns those allocations to the same user Allocations with the same N RNTI share the same modulation scheme and power settings Remote command CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt UEID on page 210 Code Word Shows the code word of the allocation The code word is made up out of two numbers The first number is the number of the code word in the allocation The second number is the total number of code words that the allocation contains Thus a table entry of 1 2 would mean that the row corre sponds to code word 1 out of 2 code words in the allocation Usually one allocation corresponds to one code word In case of measurements on a MIMO system 2 or 4 antennas in combination with the Spatial Multiplexing precod ing value however you can change the number of layers Selecting 2 or more layers assigns two code words to the allocation This results in an expansion of the configura tion table The allocation with the spatial multiplexing then comprises two rows instead of only one Except for the modulation of the code word which can be different the contents of the second code word row are the same as the contents of the first code word Modulation Selects the modulation scheme for the corresponding allocation Defining Downlink Signal Characteristics The modulation scheme for the PD
122. ask e Freq at A to Limit Shows the absolute frequency whose power measurement being closest to the limit line for the corresponding frequency segment e Power Abs Shows the absolute measured power of the frequency whose power is closest to the limit The software evaluates this value for each frequency segment e Power Rel Shows the distance from the measured power to the limit line at the frequency whose power is closest to the limit The software evaluates this value for each fre quency segment e Ato Limit Shows the minimal distance of the tolerance limit to the SEM trace for the corre sponding frequency segment Negative distances indicate the trace is below the tolerance limit positive distances indicate the trace is above the tolerance limit Spectrum Emission Mask List Pwr Abs Pwr Rel A to Limit Start Freq Rel Stop Freq Rel lee Freq at A to Limit dBm 8 ei 17 50 MHz 1 00 MHz 0 983173100 GHz 15 05 MHz MHz 0 10 MHz 10 05 MHz MHz 0 10 MHz 5 05 MHz 10 05 0 10 MHz j 0 10 MHz MHz Remote command Selecting the result display Querying results User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 46 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays ACLR Starts the Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio ACLR measurement The ACLR measurement analyzes the power of the transmission TX channel and the power of the two neighboring channels adjacent channels to the left and right of the TX channel Thus the ACL
123. at 1 DCCHBoostingdB 0 PSSYNCRepetitionPeriod 10 DataSymbolOffsetSubFrame 1 IMOConfiguration 1 Tx Antenna MIMOAntennaSelection Antenna 1 lt T S B PHICH Ng 1 PHICHNumGroups 0 PHICHDuration Normal PHICHBoostingdB 3 01 P P M P hysLayCellIDGrp Auto PhysLayID Auto RefSignal3GPPVersion 3 N c fastforward 1600 Frame Subframe lt PRBs gt lt PRB Start 0 Length 6 Boosting 0 Modulation QPSK Precoding None Layers 1 Codebook 0 CDD 0 N_RNTI 0 gt lt PRB gt lt PRBs gt lt Subframe gt lt Frame gt lt stControl PhaseTracking 1 TimingTracking 0 ChannelEstimation 1 EVMCalculationMethod 1 CompensateCrosstalk 0 EnableScrambling 1 AutoDemodulation 1 AutoBoostingEstimation 1 SubframeConfDetect 2 RefDataSource 1 MulticarrierFilter 0 gt lt stControl gt FrameDefinition 7 3 Importing and Exporting Limits In addition to the limits defined by the standard you can create and use customized limits After you have created the file you have to name it Default eutra limits and copy it into the same folder as the software binary Program folder Rohde Schwarz EUTRA LTE by default The limits are automatically loaded when you start the software The limits you can customize work for the Result Summary Limits are defined in the xml file format Any xml elements you do not want to define can be left out either by making no entry or by deleting the corr
124. at the synchronization acquisition and the cell group identifier are obtained from different synchronization signals Thus a primary synchronization signal P SYNC and a secondary synchronization signal S SYNC are assigned a predefined structure They are transmitted on the 72 center subcarriers around the DC subcarrier within the same predefined slots twice per 10 ms on different resource elements see figure 1 7 References 10 ms Radio frame a E Fr gt 0 5 ms sub frame 0 5 ms slot Bis ims Fig 1 7 P SYNC and S SYNC Structure As additional help during cell search a common control physical channel CCPCH is available which carries BCH type of information e g system bandwidth It is transmit ted at predefined time instants on the 72 subcarriers centered around the DC subcar rier In order to enable the UE to support this cell search concept it was agreed to have a minimum UE bandwidth reception capability of 20 MHz 1 2 5 Downlink Physical Layer Procedures For EUTRA the following downlink physical layer procedures are especially important e Cell search and synchronization See above e Scheduling Scheduling is done in the base station eNodeB The downlink control channel PDCCH informs the users about their allocated time frequency resources and the transmission formats to use The scheduler evaluates different types of informa tion e g quality of service parameters measurements
125. ation on loading the test model set tings see chapter 7 Data Management on page 122 If an external trigger is used before the actual measurement can be started the timing must be adjusted by pressing the Adjust Timing hotkey The status display in the header of the graph changes from Timing not adjusted to Timing adjusted and the run hotkeys are released Relevant setting changes again lead to a Timing not adjus ted status display If the adjustment fails an error message is shown and the adjustment state is still not adjusted To find out what causes the synchronization failure you should perform a regular EVM measurement i e leave the ON OFF Power measurement Then you can use all the measurement results like EVM vs Carrier to get more detailed informa tion about the failure The timing adjustment will succeed if the Sync State in the header is OK Using a R amp S FSQ or R amp S FSG it is recommended to use the external trigger mode since for high power signals a successful synchronization is not guaranteed under cer tain circumstances Pressing the Run Single hotkey starts the averaging of the traces of the number of frames given in the General Settings dialog After performing all sweeps the table in the upper half of the screen shows if the measurements pass or fail Overview of Remote Command Suffixes 9 Remote Commands When working via remote control note that you have to establish a connection between
126. b frame that has been analyzed lt EVM gt The unit depends on UNIT EVM The following parameters are supported e TRACE1 EVM vs Symbol For the EVM vs Symbol result display the command returns one value for each OFDM symbol that has been analyzed lt EVM gt For measurements on a single subframe the command returns the symbols of that subframe only The unit depends on UNIT EVM The following parameters are supported e TRACE1 EVM vs Symbol x Carrier For the EVM vs Symbol x Carrier the command returns one value for each resource element lt EVM Symbol 0 Carrier 1 gt EVM Symbol 0 Carrier n lt EVM Symbol 1 Carrier 1 gt lt EVM Symbol 1 Carrier n gt EVM Symbol n Carrier 1 EVM Symbol n Carrier n The unit depends on UNIT EVM Resource elements that are unused return NAN The following parameters are supported e TRACE1 Frequency Error vs Symbol For the Frequency Error vs Symbol result display the command returns one value for each OFDM symbol that has been analyzed frequency error gt The unit is always Hz 9 6 1 22 9 6 1 23 9 6 1 24 Remote Commands to Read Trace Data The following parameters are supported e TRACE1 On Off Power For the On Off Power measurement the number and type of return values depend on the parameter e TRACE1 Returns the power for the Off power regions lt absolute power gt
127. ble for download at http www rohde schwarz com appnote 1EF47 To establish a connection you also have to determine the network address of the ana lyzer and set it up in the LTE software Instrument Configuration The functionality necessary to establish the connection to the test equipment is part of the Analyzer Config MIMO Setup tab of the General Settings dialog box The software supports simultaneous connections to several analyzers or oscilloscopes Using a combination of analyzers and oscilloscopes is also possible The software automatically detects if you have connected an analyzer or an oscilloscope On the whole you can perform measurement on up to eight input channels Each input chan nel captures one UO data stream If you use a spectrum or signal analyzer one input channel corresponds to one instru ment s RF input Thus the required number of analyzers depends on the number of UO Connecting the Computer to an Analyzer data streams you want to measure The analyzers have to be connected to each other with one analyzer controlling the other instruments by providing the trigger If you use an oscilloscope the number of required instruments depends on the number of channels available on the oscilloscope e General lnstrument Configuration 1 mI EAR Ree 20 e Instrument Connection Confioguratton sse 21 2 3 1 1 General Instrument Configuration The general analyzer or oscilloscope configuration determines th
128. capture time Parameters lt CaptLength gt Numeric value in seconds Default unit s Example SWE TIME 40ms Defines a capture time of 40 milliseconds SENSe L TE FRAMe COUNt STATe State This command turns manual selection of the number of frames you want to analyze on and off Parameters State ON You can set the number of frames to analyze OFF The software analyzes a single sweep RST ON Example FRAM COUN STAT ON Turns manual setting of number of frames to analyze on SENSe LTE FRAMe COUNt lt Subframes gt This command sets the number of frames you want to analyze Remote Commands to Configure General Settings Parameters lt Subframes gt lt numeric value gt RST 1 Example FRAM COUN STAT ON FRAM COUN AUTO OFF Activates manual input of frames to be analyzed FRAM COUN 20 Analyzes 20 frames SENSe L TE FRAMe COUNt AUTO State This command turns automatic selection of the number of frames to analyze on and off Parameters State ON Selects the number of frames to analyze according to the LTE standard OFF Turns manual selection of the frame number on Example FRAM COUN AUTO ON Turns automatic selection of the analyzed frames on SENSe LTE FRAMe SCOunt lt Subframes gt This command selects the maximum number of subframes to analyze Selecting a number of subframes different from the default one may become neces sary
129. carrier aggregation Parameters lt Frequency gt lt numeric value gt Default unit Hz Example See SENSe LTE 00Power CAGGregation Remote Commands to Configure General Settings SENSe LTE 0OPower FREQuency LOWer Frequency This command defines the lower edge frequency for Transmit On Off Power measure ments with carrier aggregation Parameters lt Frequency gt lt numeric value gt Default unit Hz Example See SENSe LTE OOPower CAGGregation SENSe L TE OOPower NCORrection lt NoiseCorrection gt This command turns noise correction for On Off Power measurements on and off Parameters lt NoiseCorrection gt ON OFF CONFigure LTE OOPower NFRames Frames This command defines the number of frames that are analyzed for On Off Power measurements Parameters Frames numeric value Example CONF OOP NFR 10 Defines 10 frames to be analyzed 9 7 2 Configuring MIMO Measurement Setups Commands useful to configure MIMO setups described elsewhere CONFigure LTE DL CC lt cci gt MIMO ASELection on page 208 CONFigure LTE DL CC cci MIMO CONFig on page 208 CONFloure ACOhNfo JnstrumentzADDbess renes nnne nns 190 CONFigure ACONfig instrument ICSequence sess 191 CONFloure ACOhNfo JnstrumentzNCHannels eese nennen 191 CONFigtire L TE NS Ources enee Eed rhet ropa eu ud e RES e abbate
130. ce blocks CONF DL PHIC NGP NGCUSTOM Define a customized value for N CONF DL PHIC NOGR 5 Directly sets the number of PHICH groups in the subframe to 5 CONFigure LTE DL PDCCh FORMat Format This command selects the PDCCH format Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation Parameters lt Format gt 1 0 1 2 3 RST 1 Example CONF DL PDCCH FORM 0 Sets the PDDCH format to 0 CONFigure LTE DL PHICh MITM lt State gt This command includes or excludes the use of the PHICH special setting for enhanced test models Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CONF DL PHIC MITM ON Activates PHICH TDD m_i 1 E TM CONFigure LTE DL PHICh NOGRoups lt NofGroups gt This command sets the number of PHICH groups Parameters lt NofGroups gt lt numeric value gt RST 0 Example CONF DL PHIC NOGR 5 Sets number of PHICH groups to 5 CONFigure LTE DL PDCCh NOPD lt NofPDCCH gt This command sets the number of PDCCHs Parameters lt NofPDCCH gt lt numeric value gt RST 0 Example CONF DL PDCCH NOPD 3 Sets the number of DPCCHs to 3 CONFigure LTE DL PBCH POWer lt Power gt This command defines the relative power of the PBCH Parameters lt Power gt lt numeric value gt RST 0 dB Default unit DB Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation Example CONF DL PBCH POW 1 1 Set
131. ced Signal Characteristics M Physical Layer Cell Identity Auto I CallD D Cell Identity Group D Identity 0 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Demod Settings Configuring the Physical Layer Cell Identity The cell ID cell identity group and physical layer identity are interdependent parame ters In combination they are responsible for synchronization between network and user equipment The physical layer cell ID identifies a particular radio cell in the LTE network The cell identities are divided into 168 unique cell identity groups Each group consists of 3 physical layer identities According to Nip 3 Nip Nip N cell identity group 0 167 NO physical layer identity 0 2 there is a total of 504 different cell IDs If you change one of these three parameters the software automatically updates the other two For automatic detection of the cell ID turn the Auto function on Before it can establish a connection the user equipment must synchronize to the radio cell it is in For this purpose two synchronization signals are transmitted on the down link These two signals are reference signals whose content is defined by the Physical Layer Identity and the Cell Identity Group The first signal is one of 3 possible Zadoff Chu sequences The sequence that is used is defined by the physical layer identity It is part of the P SYNC The second signal is one of 168 unique sequences The sequence is
132. ci gt MIMO CONFig lt NofAntennas gt This command sets the number of antennas in the MIMO setup 9 8 2 4 Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation Parameters lt NofAntennas gt TX1 Use one Tx antenna TX2 Use two Tx antennas TX4 Use four Tx antennas RST TX1 Example CONF DL MIMO CONF TX2 TX configuration with two antennas is selected Configuring PDSCH Subframes CONFigure ETEEDLEOSUBITBmBS redeem rre ette c eed cette rece 209 CONFigure L TEL DL SUBtrame subframez AL Coumt 209 CONFigure L TE DL SUBFrame ssubframe ALLoc allocation2 GAP eese 210 CONFigure L TE DL SUBFrame subframe ALLoc allocation UEID usse 210 CONFigure L TE DL SUBFrame ssubframe ALLoc allocation CW Cwnum ejt m 210 CONFiourel TEL DL SUBtrame subframez ALL ocalocationz POWer 211 CONFigure L TE DL SUBFrame ssubframe ALLoc allocation PRECoding AP 211 CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt PRECoding CBINdex 211 CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt PRECoding CLMapping 211 CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt PRECoding CDD 212 CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt PRECoding SCHeme 212 CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt PRECoding SCID
133. cks on page 95 The x axis represents the frequency On the y axis the power level is plotted Selection Antenna 1 1 0 D 1 Frequency MHz Remote command Selecting the result display CALCulate lt screenid gt FEED SPEC PSPE Querying results TRACe DATA Power vs Resource Block PDSCH Starts the Power vs Resource Block PDSCH result display This result display shows the power of the physical downlink shared channel per resource element averaged over one resource block By default three traces are shown One trace shows the average power The second and the third trace show the minimum and maximum powers respectively You can select to display the power for a specific subframe in the Subframe Selection dialog box In that case the application shows the powers of that subframe only The x axis represents the resource blocks The displayed number of resource blocks depends on the channel bandwidth or number of resource blocks you have set On the y axis the power is plotted in dBm E User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 49 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays Power vs RB PDSCH Selection Antenna 1 Power per RE dBm Remote command Selecting the result display C Querying results Power vs Resource Block RS Starts the Power vs Resource Block RS result display This result display shows the power of the reference signal per resource element aver aged over one resource block By d
134. completely below the Off Power Density limit 1 subframe on power period 2 transient transition length 3 off power density limit 4 off power period The diagram contains an overall limit check result Pass Fail message Only if all off periods including the transients comply to the limits the overall limit check will pass Any results in the table that violate the limits defined by 3GPP are displayed in red Graphic results The lower part of the result display shows a graphical representation of the analyzed TDD frame s ON OFF Power Limit Check OffPower Density Limit 85 dBm MHz Average Count 25 25 ON Period ON Period E T ine md IESSE User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 37 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays ESSE EE EE SESE ESE SE EE EE EEE EEE SSE SS EEE EEE Se SS ee The diagram contains several elements e Yellow trace The yellow trace represents the signal power during the off periods Filtering as defined in 3GPP TS 36 141 is taken into account for the calculation of the trace e Blue trace The blue trace represents the transition periods falling and rising Note that the blue trace might be visible only after zooming into the diagram because of its steep flank and small horizontal dimensions le toned Ap Hd eA PH Ne e Blue rectangles The blue rectangles represent the on periods Because of the overload during the on periods the actual signal p
135. configure the digital UO input Advanced Settings The digital UO settings are part of the Advanced tab of the General Settings dialog box General Analyzer Config MIMO Setup Trigger Spectrum Advanced Digital 1Q Settings Source Sampling Rate 10 MHz Full Scale Level 1v Sampling Rate Input Data Rate acp cn er odia ctt at rector d notaio 87 Full Scale Ley oett axe EA Regel N 87 Sampling Rate Input Data Rate Defines the data sample rate at the digital baseband input The sample rate is available for a digital baseband input source Remote command INPut n DIQ SRATe on page 198 Full Scale Level Defines the voltage corresponding to the maximum input value of the digital baseband input Remote command INPut lt n gt DIQ RANGe UPPer on page 198 4 5 5 Global Settings The global settings contain settings that are independent of other settings The global settings are part of the Advanced tab of the General Settings dialog box General Analyzer Config MIMO Setup Trigger Spectrum Advanced Global Settings Couple Screens iv Stop Run Continuous r on Limit Check Fail ee E c EE 87 Stop Run Continuous On Limit Ghisck Fall t rtt ertet edes 87 Couple Screens Couples and decouples markers that have the same x axis unit in the top and bottom result displays e g both result displays have a frequency axis In case of the constellation diagram the constellation selection is also coupl
136. dBm Example FETC SUMM POW Returns the total power in dBm Usage Query only FETCh SUMMary QUADerror MAXimum FETCh SUMMary QUADerror MINimum FETCh SUMMary QUADerror AVERage This command queries the quadrature error Return values lt QuadError gt lt numeric value gt Minimum maximum or average quadrature error depending on the last command syntax element Default unit deg Example FETC SUMM QUAD Returns the current mean quadrature error in degrees Usage Query only FETCh CC cci SUMMary RFERror AVERage This command queries the frequency error of the component carriers Return values lt FrequencyError gt Frequency error of the component carrier CC2 relative to the main component carrier CC1 Default unit Hz Example FETC SUMM RFER AVER Returns the frequency error in Hz Usage Query only Remote Commands to Read Numeric Results FETCh SUMMary RSSI MAXimum FETCh SUMMary RSSI MINimum FETCh SUMMary RSSI AVERage This command queries the RSSI as shown in the result summary Return values lt RSSI gt lt numeric value gt Minimum maximum or average sampling error depending on the last command syntax element Default unit dBm Example FETC SUMM RSSI Queries the average RSSI Usage Query only FETCh SUMMary RSTP MAXimum FETCh SUMMary RSTP MINimum FETCh SUMMary RSTP AVERage This command queries the RSTP as shown in the re
137. ding subframe may contains MBSFN data Remote command CONFigure LTE DL MBSFn SUBFrame lt subframe gt STATe on page 225 PMCH Present Turns the Physical Multicast Channel PMCH on and off If you turn on the PMCH the resource elements of the MBSFN subframe are used by the PMCH If you turn off the PMCH the resource elements of the MBSFN subframe may be used by the PDSCH Remote command CONFigure LTE DL MBSFn SUBFrame lt subframe gt PMCH STATe on page 225 Modulation Selects the modulation scheme for the MBSFN subframe Remote command CONFigure LTE DL MBSFn SUBFrame lt subframe gt PMCH MODulation on page 225 6 Analyzing Measurement Results The measurement software provides several tools to get more detailed information on the measurement results The corresponding tools are part of the context menu gt To access the context menu click anywhere in the diagram grid with the right mouse button Marker Set Marker to D Zoom D Pan D Copy Image to Clipboard Show Data Points Default Zoom On Update Fig 6 1 Context menu Using the marker You can use a marker to get the coordinates of a single point in the diagram area gt Open the context menu and select the Marker menu item When the marker is active the software puts a check mark in front of the Marker menu item When you turn it on the software positions the marker on the trace maximum After that you can move it around fre
138. dware setup is illustrated in figure 8 5 All transmit antennas TX of the device under test DUT or an SMU are connected to the RF input of the RTO Either two or optionally four antennas are attached The LTE Software runs on a PC and is connec ted to the RTO via a local area network LAN Fig 8 5 Test setup for LTE MIMO measurements with an oscilloscope To successfully connect the software to the oscilloscope enter the correct network address in the Analyzer Configuration table and define the hardware properties for example the number of input channels General Analyzer Config MIMO Setup Trigger Spectrum Advanced Configuration DUT MIMO Configuration 2 Tx Antennas DI TX Antenna Selection Auto 2 Antennas M Num Input Channels From Antenna Selection e Analyzer Configuration Input VISA RSC ER Sahel TCPIP 192 0 2 0 Fig 8 6 Configuration of the R amp S RTO connection and input channels R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurement Basics For configuring the number of active R amp S RTO inputs the DUT MIMO configuration 2 Tx antennas or 4 Tx antennas and the Tx Antenna Selection must be set The DUT MIMO configuration describes which antennas are available and the Tx antenna selec tion defines how many UO data streams are captured and which antennas are assigned to the streams To measure more than one antenna at once Tx Antenna Selection must be set to All Auto 2 Antennas
139. e One antenna ports Resource element k l Not used for transmission on this antenna port Reference symbols on this antenna port Two antenna ports Four antenna ports P I BT TR 96 Jed 1 Je6 H DH H eee ots odd numbernd st ganba sot odd namboened slots cee ounbared sot et speed slots Reg rearion ed slots edu priere sot ee Kader H ee ee ege Antenna port 0 Antenna port 1 Amenna por 2 Anienna por 3 Fig 1 6 Downlink Reference Signal Structure Normal Cyclic Prefix The reference signal sequence carries the cell identity Each reference signal sequence is generated as a symbol by symbol product of an orthogonal sequence r S three of them existing and a pseudo random sequence r 170 of them existing Each cell identity corresponds to a unique combination of one orthogonal sequence r S and one pseudo random sequence r allowing 510 different cell identities Frequency hopping can be applied to the downlink reference signals The frequency hopping pattern has a period of one frame 10 ms During cell search different types of information need to be identified by the handset symbol and radio frame timing frequency cell identification overall transmission band width antenna configuration and cyclic prefix length Besides the reference symbols synchronization signals are therefore needed during cell search EUTRA uses a hierarchical cell search scheme similar to WCDMA This means th
140. e 184 Manual BB CONFigure POWer EXPected IQ instrument on page 184 Automatic SENSe POWer AUTO lt instrument gt STATe on page 183 Auto Level Track Time SENSe POWer AUTO lt instrument gt TIME on page 197 E User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 71 Configuring the Measurement Attenuating the Signal Attenuation of the signal may become necessary if you have to reduce the power of the signal that you have applied Power reduction is necessary for example to prevent an overload of the input mixer You can attenuate the signal at the RF input of one of the analyzers in the measure ment setup mechanical or RF attenuation or attenuate the signal externally exter nal attenuation If you attenuate or amplify the signal either way the software adjusts the numeric and graphical results accordingly In case of graphical power result displays it moves the trace s vertically by the specified value Positive values correspond to an attenuation and negative values correspond to an amplification The range of the RF attenuation depends on the hardware you are using in the mea surement setup For details refer to its data sheet If the attenuation you have set is not supported by the hardware the software corrects the attenuation and shows a corre sponding message The software shows the RF and external attenuation level in the header table next to the reference level Master Ref Level Remote com
141. e CSI reference signal configuration as defined in 3GPP TS 36 211 table 6 10 5 2 1 2 Remote command CONFigure LTE DL CSIRs CI on page 216 Subframe Configuration Defines the CSI reference signal subframe configuration index I CSI RS as defined in 3GPP TS 36 211 table 6 10 5 3 1 Remote command CONFigure LTE DL CSIRs SCI on page 217 Relative Power CSI Reference Signal Defines the power of a CSI reference signal resource element in relation to the power of a common reference signal resource element Remote command CONFigure LTE DL CSIRs POWer on page 217 Frame Number Offset Defines the system frame number of the current frame that you want to analyze Because the positioning reference signal and the CSI reference signal usually have a periodicity of several frames for some reference signal configurations is it necessary to change the expected system frame number of the frame to be analyzed Defining Advanced Signal Characteristics Note that if you define the frame number offset for either reference signal it is automat ically defined for both reference signals Remote command CONFigure LTE DL SFNO on page 216 Overwrite PDSCH Turns overwriting of PDSCH resource elements for UEs that do not consider the CSI reference signal on and off If on the software assumes that the UE is not configured to consider CSI reference signals Thus resource elements of the CSI reference signal overwrite the PDSCH res
142. e Overall Limit Check Shows the overall limit check results PASS indicates a positive result FAIL a negative result Adi Chan Leakage Power Limit Adjacent 45 dB Ratio List Limit Alternate 45 dB Overall Limit Check Remote command Selecting the result display CALCulate lt n gt FEED SPEC ACP Querying results CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion POWer RESult CURRent TRACe DATA Querying limit check results CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RESult on page 173 CALCulate n LIMit k ACPower ALTernate RESult on page 174 User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 48 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays eS SS EE EE EEE EE EEE EE EE EEE SS ee SS SS SS 3 4 2 Power Spectrum UO Measurements Eemer Spectrum e eege SEENEN Seed ed 49 Power vs Resource Block DDSCH eene nnne rsen nennen 49 Power vs Resource Block IS ditate ero a err er be i e t a ca fee a ed 50 RS ol 50 Channel Flatness Difference 0 0 0 0 ccccecccccceessesecececeesseeeeeceaneeseceseceaaaeeeeeeeaceuaeeeeeeeanagaees 51 Channel Group Delay ener ero Apnea pae EIC eects ines a aetna ties 51 Power Spectrum Starts the Power Spectrum result display This result display shows the power density of the complete capture buffer in dBm Hz The displayed bandwidth depends on bandwidth or number of resource blocks you have set For more information see Channel Bandwidth Number of Resource Blo
143. e Physical Layer Cell Identtv nenne nnn nnnenn nnan 97 e Configuring MIMO Measurements esses enemies 98 e Configuring POSCH SuUblralTigs iets ce ci e e dt e S sds 99 Defining the Physical Signal Characteristics The physical signal characteristics contain settings to describe the physical attributes of a downlink LTE signal The physical settings are part of the Downlink Signal Characteristics tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box Downlink Demodulation Settings Downlink Signal Characteristics Downlink Advanced Signal Characteristics M Physical Settings Channel Bandwidth E MHz 15 RB DI Sampling Rate 3 84 MHz Occupied BW 2 715 MHz Cyclic Prefix Auto v FFT Size 256 Occupied Carriers 181 TDD UL DL Allocations Conf 0 v TDD Allocations DL SU UU DL S UL UL UL Conf of Special Subframe Conf 0 X Channel Bandwidth Number of Resource Blocks Specifies the channel bandwidth and number of resource blocks RB The channel bandwidth and number of resource blocks RB are interdependent Cur rently the LTE standard recommends six bandwidths see table below The software also calculates the FFT size sampling rate occupied bandwidth and occupied carriers from the channel bandwidth Those are read only Defining Downlink Signal Characteristics Number of Resource Blocks ENENEN Sample Rate MHZ i35 sore 3072 FFT Size 1024 2048 2048 The software shows the currently selected
144. e certain aspects of this measurement The Time Alignment measurement settings are part of the General Settings tab of the General Settings dialog box General Analyzer Config MIMO Setup Trigger Spectrum Advanced Time Alignment Measurement Settings Num of Component Carriers 2 e CC2 Frequency 1 GHz CC2 DEMOD SETTINGS Garriot AG GISG AUOMN m 77 User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 76 Configuring the Measurement Carrier Aggregation The software supports Time Alignment Error measurements with carrier aggregation Select the number of carriers from the Number of Component Carriers dropdown menu If you select more than one carrier define the frequency of the other carrier in the CC2 Frequency field The CC2 Demod Settings button opens a dialog box to configure the signal charac teristics of the second carrier This dialog contains a selection of the demodulation set tings For more information see chapter 5 Demod Settings on page 89 Note that the software shows measurement results for the second component carrier even if only one antenna of the second component carrier is attached i e no combiner is used Remote command CONFigure NOCC on page 189 SENSe FREQuency CENTer CC lt cci gt on page 182 CC2 Demod settings see chapter 9 8 Remote Command to Configure the Demodula tion on page 199 4 1 7 Configuring Transmit On Off Power Measurements The On Off Power measurement
145. e computer 2 3 2 2 3 2 1 Connecting the Computer to an Analyzer Available for LAN bus systems using either the VXI 11 protocol or a Rohde amp Schwarz specific protocol RSIB The interface type is either LAN VXI 11 or LAN RSIB Contact your local IT support for information on free IP addresses The RSIB protocol is supported by all firmware version of the R amp S analyzers and oscilloscopes The VXI 11 protocol is supported as of R amp S FSQ firmware version 3 65 and by all firmware version of the R amp S FSV R R amp S FSG and oscilloscopes e Complete VISA Resource String Allows you to enter the complete VISA resource string manually A VISA string is made up out of the elements mentioned above separated by double colons e g GPIB 20 INSTR Available for interface type Free Entry Subsystem Shows the subsystem in use Typically you do not have to change the subsystem VISA RSC Shows or defines the complete VISA resource string SCPI command CONFigure ACONfig lt instrument gt ADDRess on page 190 Test Connection Button that tests the connection If the connection has been established successfully the software returns a PASSED message If not it shows a FAILED message Figuring Out IP Addresses Each of the supported instruments logs its network connection information in a different place Find instructions on how to find out the necessary information below Figuring Out the Address
146. e delay by performing a single measurement on one analyzer Measure the time it takes until the DSP indicator starts flashing Note that this estimation also includes the time it takes to transfer the I Q samples from the analyzer to the software MIMO Measurement Guide A typical delay to arm the trigger is 2 seconds per instrument The minimum delay of the trigger signal must now be greater than the measured time multiplied with the number of measured antennas the number of analyzers because the spectrum analyzers are initialized sequentially The usage of an LTE frame trigger is not possible for this measurement setup Measurements with a frame trigger signal You can use a frame trigger if all transmitted LTE frames use the same frame configu ration and contain the same data In this case the analyzers in the test setup capture data from different LTE frames but with the same content This method to analyze data however raises one issue The phase variations of the reference oscillators of the different signals that are transmitted are not the same because the data is not captured simultaneously The result is a phase error which degrades the EVM see the figures below An application for this measurement method is for example the test of the MIMO pre coding implementation Because of the bad EVM values it is not recommended to use this test setup to measure hardware performance uL oe os UCX UN 05 1 CS w 7 0
147. e frame number offset for the positioning reference signal Parameters lt Offset gt lt numeric value gt Example CONF DL SFNO 4 Defines a frame number offset of 4 9 8 3 4 Configuring the CSI Reference Signal CONFigure E TE DL CSIRS C taie eret rore ten petet ee REENEN ape rentrer prd de 216 GONFigure L TEEDE CSIBSNAP iiti ut eaput p as ep appuie impu eet ae eere ea ree dn EECH 217 CONFigure L TE DIsCSIRS Ee DE 217 CONFigure E TERBEOSIBSIPONMIBr 2 2 prata erreur steadied n veh NEEN SEAN 217 CON Figuire L TE DLC SIRS S Cl ices niae daac conatu opea e e treo rete s eec tr 217 GONFigure L TEP DLICSIRS S TA KC 218 CONFigure LTE DL CSIRs Cl lt Index gt This command selects the configuration index for the CSI reference signal Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation Parameters lt Index gt MNEM Number of the configuration index Range 0 to 31 Example CONF DL CSIR CI 12 Selects configuration index 12 for the CSI reference signal CONFigure LTE DL CSIRs NAP lt Ports gt This command selects the number of antenna ports that transmit the CSI reference signal Parameters lt Ports gt TX1 TX2 TX4 TX8 Example CONF DL CSIR NAP TX2 Selects 2 antenna ports for the CSI reference signal transmis sion CONFigure L TE DL CSIRs OPDSch State This command turns overwriting of PDSCH resource elements for UEs that do not con sider the CSI reference signal on and off Parameter
148. e frequency domain for the Af 15 kHz Af 7 5 kHz case In the time domain a physical resource block consists of DL Nsymb consecutive OFDM symbols see figure 1 5 sm is equal to the number of OFDM sym bols in a slot The resource block size is the same for all bandwidths therefore the number of available physical resource blocks depends on the bandwidth Depending on the required data rate each UE can be assigned one or more resource blocks in each transmission time interval of 1 ms The scheduling decision is done in the base station eNodeB The user data is carried on the physical downlink shared channel PDSCH Downlink control signaling on the physical downlink control channel PDCCH is used to convey the scheduling decisions to individual UEs The PDCCH is located in the first OFDM symbols of a slot Downlink Reference Signal Structure and Cell Search The downlink reference signal structure is important for cell search channel estimation and neighbor cell monitoring figure 1 6 shows the principle of the downlink reference signal structure for one antenna two antenna and four antenna transmission Specific predefined resource elements in the time frequency domain carry the reference signal sequence Besides first reference symbols there may be a need for second reference symbols The different colors in figure 1 6 represent the sequences transmitted from up to four transmit antennas Long Term Evolution Downlink Transmission Schem
149. e general MIMO setup The purpose of the general MIMO setup is to assign an analyzer or oscilloscope channel to a particular UO data stream For successful measurements you have to configure each instrument individually in the Analyzer Configuration table The number of table rows depends on the number of input channels you have selected Analyzer Configuration Input Number of Analyzer Chanal VISA RSC Channels Input Channel 1 Master LOCALHOST 3 Ei Input Channel Shows the number of the analyzer in the test setup or the channel number of an oscil loscope If you are using several instruments the first input channel always represents the con trolling master instrument VISA RSC Opens a dialog box to configure the instrument connection in the network see chap ter 2 3 1 2 Instrument Connection Configuration on page 21 If you perform MIMO measurements with several instruments you have to establish a network connection for each instrument Number of Channels Defines the number of channels of an oscilloscope that you want to use The number of instruments to configure is reduced if you use an instrument with more than one channel The software also adjusts the contents of the Analyzer Input Chan nel If you perform the measurement with one or more signal analyzers for example R amp S FSW the number of channels has to be 1 2 3 1 2 Connecting the Computer to an Analyzer
150. e lower and higher edge frequencies must not be too large If one of these conditions is not met the fields turn red or the software shows an error message Remote command SENSe LTE OOPower CAGGregation on page 189 SENSe LTE OOPower FREQuency LOWer on page 190 SENSe LTE OOPower FREQuency HIGHer on page 189 Configuring MIMO Measurement Setups The MIMO settings contain settings to configure a MIMO test setup and control the instruments in that test setup The MIMO settings are part of the Analyzer Config MIMO Setup tab of the General Settings dialog box General Analyzer Config MIMO Setup Trigger Spectrum Advanced Configuration DUT MIMO Configuration 2 Tx Antennas D TX Antenna Selection Auto Y Num Input Channels 2 e Analyzer Configuration Input Number of Analyzer Channel VISA RSC Channels Input Channel 1 Master TCPIP 192 0 2 0 MIMO COnnguravlOi cisterna nies 79 MIMO Analyzer Conftguraton senten enne nennen nennen 81 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC General Settings MIMO Configuration The software supports measurements on DUTs with up to 8 antennas and is thus able to capture up to 8 I Q data streams You can select the number of antennas that trans mit cell specific reference signals antenna ports AP 0 to 3 from the DUT MIMO Con figuration dropdown menu The Tx Antenna Selection dropdown menu selects a particular antenna
151. e signal characteristics in the General Settings dialog box e Defining General Signal Characheristtce AAA 68 e COMMUTE He Le ET 69 Configuring the Input bevel cierre or eer ert etd E ry ted Serre hedera reset 70 e Configuring the Data Capture 72 e Configuring Measurement Results enne 74 e Configuring Time Alignment Measurements A 76 e Configuring Transmit On Off Power Measurements TT Defining General Signal Characteristics The general signal characteristics contain settings to describe the general physical attributes of the signal The signal characteristics are part of the General Settings tab of the General Set tings dialog box General Analyzer Config MIMO Setup Trigger Spectrum Advanced Signal Characteristics Standard Es PP LTE Y Duplexing TDD Link Direction Upik zl Frequency 1GHz Selec ng ne LTE Modga rore tec qu a toL RR e Rus 68 Defining the Signal Frequency ccccciesecccceterssececerseeuececeteessccectetsssceeetesateceeneeeees 69 Selecting the LTE Mode The LTE mode is a combination of the Standard always 3GPP LTE the Duplexing mode and the Link Direction The choices you have depend on the set of options you have installed R amp S FS K100 102 104PC General Settings option FSx K100 PC enables testing of 3GPP LTE FDD signals on the downlink option FSx K101 PC enables testing of 3GPP LTE FDD signals on the uplink option FSx K102 PC enables testi
152. e source of the data that is processed is either a live signal or a previously recorded signal whose characteristics have been saved to a file For more information see Selecting the Input Source on page 70 In both cases you can perform a continuous or a single measurement Continuous measurements capture and analyze the signal continuously and stop only after you turn it off manually gt Press the Run Cont softkey to start and stop continuous measurements Single measurements capture and analyze the signal over a particular time span or number of frames The measurement stops after the time has passed or the frames have been captured P Press the Run Sg softkey to start a single measurement You can also repeat a measurement based on the data that has already been cap tured e g if you want to apply different demodulation settings to the same signal P Press the Refresh softkey to measure the signal again This chapter provides information on all types of measurements that the LTE measure ment software supports Note that all measurements are based on the UO data that is captured except the Spectrum Emission Mask and the Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio Those are based on a frequency sweep the analyzer performs for the measurement SCPI command INITiate IMMediate on page 149 INITiate REFResh on page 149 e JNumsrical ROSulls 5 met m ente onere teet tenet EENS 32 e Measuring the Power Over TIITIO
153. e trigger event The software supports several trigger modes or sources e Free Run Starts the measurement immediately and measures continuously e External The trigger event is the level of an external trigger signal The measurement starts when this signal meets or exceeds a specified trigger level at the Ext Trigger Gate input Some measurement devices have several trigger ports When you use one of these you can additionally select the trigger port 1 to 3 you want to use e F Power The trigger event is the IF power level The measurement starts when the IF power meets or exceeds a specified power trigger level e Trigger Unit FS Z11 The R amp S FS Z11 is a trigger unit designed to control triggers in MIMO measure ment setups Note that the trigger unit is not compatible with oscilloscope measurements For more information see Measurements with the R amp S FS Z11 trigger unit on page 134 and the documentation of the R amp S FS Z11 4 4 4 4 1 Spectrum Settings You can define a power level for an external and an IF power trigger For most trigger sources you can select the trigger slope The trigger slope defines whether triggering occurs when the signal rises to the trigger level or falls down to it The measurement starts as soon as the trigger event happens It may become neces sary to start the measurement some time after the trigger event In that case define a trigger offset or trigger delay The trigger offs
154. ectrum efficiency The downlink target is three to four times better than Release 6 The uplink target is two to three times better than Release 6 e Latency The one way transit time between a packet being available at the IP layer in either the UE or radio access network and the availability of this packet at IP layer in the radio access network UE shall be less than 5 ms Also C plane latency shall be reduced e g to allow fast transition times of less than 100 ms from camped state to active state e Bandwidth Scaleable bandwidths of 5 MHz 10 MHz 15 MHz and 20 MHz shall be supported Also bandwidths smaller than 5 MHz shall be supported for more flexibility e Interworking Interworking with existing UTRAN GERAN systems and non 3GPP Systems shall be ensured Multimode terminals shall support handover to and from UTRAN and GERAN as well as inter RAT measurements Interruption time for handover between EUTRAN and UTRAN GERAN shall be less than 300 ms for realtime services and less than 500 ms for non realtime services e Multimedia broadcast multicast services MBMS MBMS shall be further enhanced and is then referred to as E MBMS e Costs Reduced CAPEX and OPEX including backhaul shall be achieved Costef fective migration from Release 6 UTRA radio interface and architecture shall be possible Reasonable system and terminal complexity cost and power consump tion shall be ensured All the interfaces specified shall be open for multiv
155. ed to the marker Stop Run Continuous On Limit Check Fail Stops a continuous measurement if the signal fails any limit check in the currently active result display For example the measurement would stop on an EVM PDSCH QPSK limit check fail if the result summary is active Advanced Settings 4 5 6 Mapping Antenna Ports The antenna port mapping settings contain settings that map antenna ports to a spe cific input channel The antenna port mapping settings are part of the Advanced tab of the General Set tings dialog box General Analyzer Config MIMO Setup Trigger Spectrum Advanced Antenna Port Mapping EE Antenna Port Auto z Input Channel 1 UE CSI RS Antenna Port 88 Input Channel 1 UE CSI RS Antenna Port Selects the beamforming antenna port that is measured on the first UO data stream The first UO data stream corresponds to input channel 1 By default the software automatically assigns the antenna port to the input channel To assign a specific antenna port to the first input channel select the required antenna port from the dropdown menu Assigning the antenna port to the input channel is necessary to measure the EVM for all available UE CSI RS antenna ports When you perform a measurement on a MIMO signal with more than one UO streams the remaining antenna ports are assigned in ascending order to the inputs Remote command CONFigure LTE DL CC cci MIMO SUAP on page 199 Configuring Downl
156. eeeces esee esee nnne 154 FETCh SUMMary EVM PSIGnal MAXImu tm iec iiir eri eei ete ed e ada co cna EEN 154 FETCh SUMMary EVM PSIGnalMINimutmi ui a nn nnne na Rea dne 154 FE TCh SUMMarv EVM P lGnall AVERagel nennen nnne nenne 154 al leie Ee FERRON MAXIMUM KEE 154 FETCH SUMMary FERRor MINIMNUIN rraren a aa Ea n aiiis 154 FETCh SUMMary FERRor AVERage ssssssssssseseenene nenne enhn nnne nennen nnns nns 154 FETCh SUMMary GIMBalance MAXIMUM Zeinena a a ANEN 155 FETCh SUMMary GIMBalance MINIMUM ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeae aaa eaaaeaeedeeeeeeeeeeeereees 155 FE TCh SUMMarv GlM alancel AVERagel ener 155 FE TCh SUMMarv JOOFtserMANimum eee eeeecaeaea ea aa aaeaceeseseseeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 155 al Here Eiere el e 155 FEICh SUMMary IQOFfset AVERage iio econtra ana deze vsu 155 FE TCh SUMMarv OSTP MANImum nt ne senes enn enn nns nn nnn 155 FETCH SUMMaryOS TP MINIMUM cado tte oerte SE EES 155 Remote Commands to Read Numeric Results FE TCh SUMMarv OSTPIAVEhRagoel cece ee cae naranai eene emnes nnns nnn tn entran 155 FETCH SUMMan POWerMABXIBT Ee dee EEN 156 FETChH SUMMary POWer MINIMUM cccciiesdecxeiessncconeetei nea a a Ea ai 156 FETCH SUMMary POWerlAV BRAGG 32 te reote eene AA SEART 156 FETCH SUMMancQUuADEITOR MAXI enar oet net ero nne trennen 156 FETCh SUMMary QUADerror MINiUI iiio ioo v uc ratus anaa 156 FETCh SUMMary QUADerrorm AVERAage 2 ete
157. efault three traces are shown One trace shows the average power The second and the third trace show the minimum and maximum powers respectively You can select to display the power for a specific subframe in the Subframe Selection dialog box In that case the application shows the power of that subframe only The x axis represents the resource blocks The displayed number of resource blocks depends on the channel bandwidth or number of resource blocks you have set On the y axis the power is plotted in dBm Power vs RB Ref Signal Selection Antenna 1 Remote command Selecting the result display C Querying results Channel Flatness Starts the Channel Flatness result display User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 50 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays This result display shows the relative power offset caused by the transmit channel The currently selected subframe depends on your sele The x axis represents the frequency On the y axis the channel flatness is plotted in dB Channel Flatness Maximum 3 020dB 0 015MHz Selection Antenna 1 Minimum 4 500 MHz Remote command Selecting the result display Querying results Channel Flatness Difference Starts the Channel Flatness Difference result display This result display shows the level difference in the spectrum flatness result between two adjacent physical subcarriers The currently selected subframe depends on your ze The x axis represen
158. ely to any point of the trace In result displays that contain more than one trace for example EVM vs Carrier you can select the trace the marker is positioned on Peak Minimum or Average trace with the Set Marker To menu item Note that Set Marker To is only available if a marker is already active Marker positioning If you try to put the marker on a coordinate not occupied by the trace the software puts the marker to the nearest trace maximum if you place it above the trace or the near est trace minimum if you place it below the trace The marker coordinates are displayed in the upper left area of the diagram The first number shows the vertical position the second number the horizontal position of the marker including the units If you want to reposition the marker on the trace maximum after moving H around you have to first deactivate the marker and then reactivate it To deactivate the marker open the context menu and reselect the Marker menu item o Note that the marker is not available for all measurements and result displays Displaying data points In result displays that contain a line trace only for example the Power Spectrum you can display the data points the trace is based on with the Show Data Points menu item The data points are displayed in addition to the line trace Some result displays already contain the data points by default for example EVM vs Symbol Note that information might get l
159. ement is selected CSI RS Weights Magnitude Selection Subfr 8 CH1 T Max D dB c Min 13 010 dB 0 18 13 0103 13 0103 0 2 0 0 2 Frequency MHz Remote command Selecting the result display C Querying results User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 65 3 8 3GPP Test Scenarios CSI RS Weights Phase Starts the CSI RS Weights Phase result display This result display shows the phase of the measured weights of the CSI specific refer ence signal carriers You can use it to calculate the phase difference between different antenna ports The x axis represents the frequency with the unit depending on your selection The y axis shows the phase of each reference signal in degree The results correspond to the data of one subframe Thus the result display shows results if you have selected a particular subframe gt Subframe Selection You can select the antenna port to be measured via the Beamforming Selection soft key Note that you can select the antenna port only if the CSI RS weights phase mea surement is selected Remote command Selecting the result display CALCulate lt screenid gt FEED BEAM IRWP Querying results TRACe DATA Beamforming Selection Filters the displayed results to include only certain antenna port s The availability of antenna ports depends on the number of transmission antennas and the number of beamforming layers you are testing Beamforming Antenna Port aP 5 7 D Remote c
160. ency in Hz gt lt stop frequency in Hz gt lt RBW in Hz gt lt limit fail frequency in Hz gt lt absolute power in dBm gt relative power in dBc limit distance in dB limit check result The limit check result is either a 0 for PASS or a 1 for FAIL UE RS Weights Magnitude Difference For the UE RS Weights Magnitude and UE RS Weights Magnitude Difference result display the command returns one value for each subcarrier that has been analyzed Magnitude The unit dB The following parameters are supported e TRACE1 Returns the magnitude of the measured weights of the reference signal RS carri ers over one subframe UE RS Weights Phase Difference For the UE RS Weights Phase and UE RS Weights Phase Difference result display the command returns one value for each subcarrier that has been analyzed Phase The unit degrees The following parameters are supported e TRACE1 Returns the phase of the measured weights of the reference signal RS carriers over one subframe Return Value Codes This chapter contains a list for encoded return values lt ACK NACK gt The range is 1 1 e 1 ACK e 0 NACK e 1 DTX Remote Commands to Read Trace Data lt allocation ID gt Represents the allocation ID The range is as follows e 0 65535 PDSCH e 1 Invalid not used e 2 All e 3 P SYNC e 4 S SYNC e 5 Reference Signal Antenna 1 e 6 Reference Sign
161. endor equipment interoperability e Mobility The system should be optimized for low mobile speed 0 to 15 km h but higher mobile speeds shall be supported as well including high speed train envi ronment as a special case e Spectrum allocation Operation in paired frequency division duplex FDD mode and unpaired spectrum time division duplex TDD mode is possible e Co existence Co existence in the same geographical area and co location with GERAN UTRAN shall be ensured Also co existence between operators in adja cent bands as well as cross border co existence is a requirement e Quality of Service End to end quality of service QoS shall be supported VoIP should be supported with at least as good radio and backhaul efficiency and latency as voice traffic over the UMTS circuit switched networks e Network synchronization Time synchronization of different network sites shall not be mandated User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 8 Long Term Evolution Downlink Transmission Scheme 1 2 Long Term Evolution Downlink Transmission Scheme 1 2 1 OFDMA The downlink transmission scheme for EUTRA FDD and TDD modes is based on con ventional OFDM In an OFDM system the available spectrum is divided into multiple carriers called sub carriers which are orthogonal to each other Each of these subcarriers is independ ently modulated by a low rate data stream OFDM is used as well in WLAN WiMAX and broadcast technologies like DVB
162. enna port 0 using for example the enhanced test models like E TM 1 1 The reference antenna for this measurement is always antenna one The x axis represents the frequency with the unit depending on your selection The y axis shows the phase of each reference signal in degree The results correspond to the data of one subframe Thus the result display shows results if you have selected a particular subframe gt Subframe Selection EECH User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 64 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays Cell specific RS Weights Selection Phase Difference 1 Frequency MHz Remote command Selecting the result display enid Querying results ch on page 162 CSI RS Weights Magnitude Starts the CSI RS Weights Magnitude result display This result display shows the magnitude of the measured weights of the CSI specific reference signal carriers You can use it to calculate the magnitude difference between different antenna ports The x axis represents the frequency with the unit depending on your selection The y axis shows the amplitude of each reference signal in dB The results correspond to the data of one subframe Thus the result EEN shows results if you have selected a particular subframe gt Su ne Sele ye You can select the antenna port to be measured via the mformit ection soft key Note that you can select the antenna port only if the UE RS weights magnitude measur
163. ent Resuhts nentrn nnnnnn rannen nn nnnennn nanan nen 186 e Configuring Time Alignment Measuremente nnn nn nenn 188 e Configuring On Off Power Meaeurements nanna 189 Defining General Signal Characteristics CONFigure LTE DUPLCXING iriri ado es to ceci ee dee tree a Aaa aa vas 182 CONFigure L TE LDilbRechon eene enne enne nennen nsn tn nnt re rere naa 182 SENSE FREQUENCY CENTRI OO oel acuit eerta root eter etat gu eet ettet ete atto 182 CONFigure LTE DUPLexing lt Duplexing gt This command selects the duplexing mode Parameters lt Duplexing gt TDD Time division duplex FDD Frequency division duplex RST FDD Example CONF DUPL TDD Activates time division duplex CONFigure L TE LDIRection Direction This command selects the link direction Parameters Direction DL Downlink UL Uplink Example CONF LDIR DL EUTRA LTE option is configured to analyze downlink signals SENSe FREQuency CENTer CC lt cci gt Frequency This command sets the center frequency for RF measurements Remote Commands to Configure General Settings Parameters lt Frequency gt lt numeric value gt Range fmin to fmax RST 1 GHz Default unit Hz Example Measurement on one carrier FREQ CENT 1GHZ Defines a center frequency of 1 GHz Example Measurement on aggregated carriers FREQ CENT CC1 850MHZ Defines a center frequency of 850 MHz for the first carrier 9 7 1 2 Selecting the
164. epresented by horizontal red lines The software performs two types of limit check e The limit check for the limits defined for the channel power of each adjacent chan nel The channel power limit check is based on the green trace e The minimum distance of the actual power to the limit line in each channel In addi tion to the distance in dB the software also shows the frequency at which the minimum distance has been measured in each channel The distance to the limit line is measured for the yellow trace User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 47 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays The limit check result evaluates both types of limit check If one or both of the limit checks in each channel has passed the overall limit check for that channel also passes If both limit checks fail the overall limit check for that channel also fails ACLR table A table above the result display contains information about the measurement in numer ical form e Channel Shows the channel type TX Adjacent or Alternate Channel e Bandwidth Shows the bandwidth of the channel e Spacing Shows the channel spacing e Channel Power Shows the absolute or relative power of the corresponding channel e Ato Limit dB Shows the minimum distance to the limit line in the corresponding channel e Frequency at A to Limit GHz Shows the frequency of the trace point with the minimum distance to the limit line in the corresponding channel
165. erence level as low as possible At the same time make sure that the maximum signal level does not exceed the refer ence level If it does it will overload the A D converter regardless of the signal power Measurement results may deteriorate e g EVM This applies especially for measure ments with more than one active channel near the one you are trying to measure 6 MHz Note that the signal level at the A D converter may be stronger than the level the appli cation displays depending on the current resolution bandwidth This is because the resolution bandwidths are implemented digitally after the A D converter You can either specify the RF Reference Level in dBm or Baseband Reference Level in V depending on the input source You can also use automatic detection of the reference level with the Auto Level function If active the software measures and sets the reference level to its ideal value before each sweep This process slightly increases the measurement time You can define the measurement time of that measurement with the Auto Level Track Time gt Advanced tab Automatic level detection also optimizes RF attenuation Automatic level detection is available for an RF input source The software shows the current reference level of the first input channel including RF and external attenuation in the header table Master Ref Level Remote command Manual RF CONFigure POWer EXPected RF instrument on pag
166. erying results User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 44 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays 3 4 Measuring the Spectrum 3 4 1 This chapter contains information on all measurements that show the power of a signal in the frequency domain In addition to the UO measurements spectrum measurements also include two fre quency sweep measurements the Spectrum Emission Mask and the Adjacent Chan nel Leakage Ratio Frequency Sweep Measurements The Spectrum Emission Mask SEM and Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio ACLR measurements are the only frequency sweep measurements available for the EUTRA LTE measurement software They do not use the I Q data all other measure ments use Instead those measurements sweep the frequency spectrum every time you run a new measurement Therefore it is not possible to to run an UO measurement and then view the results in the frequency sweep measurements and vice versa Also because each of the frequency sweep measurements uses different settings to obtain signal data it is not possible to run a frequency sweep measurement and view the results in another frequency sweep measurement Frequency sweep measurements are available if RF input is selected Note that unwanted emissions measurements for example the ACLR are not suppor ted for measurements with an oscilloscope Spectrum Mask Starts the Spectrum Emission Mask SEM result display The Spectrum Emission Mask measurement sho
167. es named according to the pro Licensing the Software cessor architecture OMNIKEY3x21_ x86 or OMNIKEY3x21_ x64 Detailed informa tion on the file content and the download location for updated drivers can be found in the ReadMe txt file in the same folder Windows tries to get log in information from the card immediately after you have locked o You may have problems locking a computer while the card is inserted because MS the computer Solve this issue by changing a registry entry Either execute the registry file DisableCAD reg in the same folder the USM Smartcard reader installation files are located Or manually change the entry e Open the Windows Start Menu and select the Run item e Enter regedit in the dialog to open the system reigistry e Navigate to HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE Microsoft Windows CurrentVersion policies Nsystem e Set the value of DisableCAD to 0 Note that security policies may prevent you from editing the value Contact your IT administrator if you have problems with editing the value or installing the drivers Ordering licenses In case of registered licenses the license key code is based on the serial number of the R amp S FSPC smartcard Thus you need to know the serial number when you order a new license 1 Start the software without a connected dongle 2 Press the SETUP key 3 Press the Dongle License Info softkey The software opens the Rohde amp Schwa
168. es the ID or N_RNTI Parameters lt ID gt ID of the user equipment Example CONF DL SUBF2 ALL5 UEID 5 Assigns the ID 5 to allocation 5 in subframe 2 CONFigure LTE DL 5SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt CW lt Cwnum gt MODulation Modulation This command selects the modulation of an allocation in a downlink subframe Suffix lt Cwnum gt 1 n Selects the codeword Parameters Modulation QPSK QPSK modulation QAM16 16QAM modulation QAM64 64QAM modulation QAM256 256QAM modulation RST QPSK Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation Example CONF DL SUBF2 ALL5 CW2 MOD QAM64 Selects a 64QAM modulation for the second codeword of alloca tion 5 in subframe 2 CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt POWer Power This command defines the relative power of an allocation in a downlink subframe Parameters lt Power gt lt numeric value gt RST 0 dB Default unit DB Example CONF DL SUBF2 ALL5 POW 1 3 Defines a relative power of 1 3 dB for allocation 5 in subframe 2 CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt PRECoding AP lt Port gt This command selects the antenna port for the beamforming scheme The command is available for measurements on a single antenna Parameters lt Port gt 5 7 8 Example CONF DL SUBF2 ALL3 PREC AP 5 Selects antenna port 5 for beamforming in allocation 3 in sub frame
169. esponding element Limits DL lt EVM gt Importing and Exporting Limits PDSCHQPSK Mean 0 175 gt lt PDSCHQPSK gt lt Unit linear 1 0 dB 0 1 20 dB gt lt PDSCH16QAM Mean 0 125 gt lt PDSCH16QAM gt lt Unit linear 1 0 dB 0 1 20 dB gt lt PDSCH64QAM Mean 0 08 gt lt PDSCH64QAM gt lt Unit linear 1 0 dB 0 1 20 dB gt lt PhysicalChannel gt lt PhysicalChannel gt lt Unit linear 1 0 dB 0 1 20 dB gt lt PhysicalSignal gt lt PhysicalSignal gt lt Unit linear 1 0 dB 0 1 20 dB gt XAll All Unit linear 1 0 dB 0 1 20 dB gt lt EVM gt lt FrequencyError gt lt FrequencyError gt lt Unit Hz gt SamplingClockError SamplingClockError Unit ppm gt lt TimeAlignmentError gt lt TimeAlignmentError gt lt Unit ns gt IQOffset IQOffset Unit linear 1 0 dB 0 1 20 dB gt IQGainImbalance IQGainImbalance Unit linear 1 0 dB 0 1 20 dB gt IQQuadraturError IQQuadraturError Unit gt lt OSTP gt lt OSTP gt lt Unit W gt lt PowerTotal gt lt PowerTotal gt lt Unit W gt lt CrestFactor gt lt CrestFactor gt lt Unit linear 1 0 dB 10 10 dB gt OffPowSpectralDensity Limit 85 gt lt OffPowSpectralDensity gt lt Unit dBm MHz gt lt DL gt lt Limits gt Symbols and Variables 8 Measurement Basics 8 1
170. esses 177 CALOCulate n LIMit k SUMMary EVM DSQP AVERage RESUIt eeeeeeesesssss 177 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks SGUMMarv EVMDSGE MAXimum RE Su 178 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks SGUMMarv EVMDSGETIAVERaoelREGut eese 178 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMary EVM DSST MAXimum RESUuIt cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaes 178 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks SGUMMarv EVM DSGTIAVERaoelREGu ennnen eeeeeeeene 178 CALOCulate n LIMit k SUMMary EVM PCHannel MAXimum RESUIt ssss 178 CALOCulate n LIMit k SUMMary EVM PCHannel AVERage RESUIt 178 Remote Commands to Read Trace Data CAL Culate nz 1 lMitcks SGUMMarv EVM PGlGnal MA Nimum REGu seenen 179 CALOCulate n LIMit k SUMMary EVM PSIGnal AVERage RESUIt sess 179 CALOCulate n LIMit k SUMMary FERRor MAXimum RESUIt ees 179 CALOCulate n LIMit k SUMMary FERRor AVERage RESUIt sees 179 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMary GIMBalance MAXimum RESUuIt cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 180 CALOulate n LIMit k SUMMary GIMBalance AVERage RESUIt uuu 180 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks SGUMMarv IOOFtserMANimum RE Gu 180 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks SUMMarv IOOFtsel AVERaoelRESu eese neeeereersrersnseeen 180 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMary QUADerror MAXimumM RESUlt nasasa nenene nne eneeererererereeee 180 CALOCulate n LIMi
171. et is the time that should pass between the trigger event and the start of the measurement The trigger offset may be a negative time The trigger offset is then called a pretrigger The trigger offset is available for all trigger modes except free run Remote command For a comprehensive list of commands to define trigger characteristics see chap ter 9 7 3 Using a Trigger on page 192 Spectrum Settings The spectrum settings contain settings to configure frequency sweep measurements ACLR and SEM You can find the spectrum settings in the General Settings dialog box Configuring SEM and ACLR Measurements The SEM Spectrum Emission Mask and ACLR Adjacent Channel Leakage Ratio settings contain settings that define aspects of those measurements The SEM and ACLR settings are part of the Spectrum tab of the General Settings dialog box General Analyzer Config MIMO Setup Trigger Spectrum Advanced SEM and ACLR Settings Category Medium Range bad Assumed Adj Channel Carrier EUTRA same Bw z ACLR Noise Correction E Auto Gating Iv TX Power Au D Odem E E 82 Aggregated Maximum Power Of All TX Ports E 83 TA MENTI T TT METAM 83 Assumed Adjacent Channel Cartier diei edere erste td ka Eee Pa REENEN 83 Noise COME CUOM a 2 oai a errta tte videndacansaseadsuaae Eder 84 AUO GING EE 84 Category Selects the type category and option of the limit defintions for SEM measurements Spectrum Settings
172. extended the PHICH resource which is the same as PHICH N 1 6 1 2 1 or 2 System frame number If the CRC is not valid a corresponding message is shown instead of the results Results for the PBCH can only be determined if the PHICH Duration or the PHICH N g are automatically determined Auto or if automatic decoding of all control channels is turned on e PCFICH For the PCFICH the Channel Decoder provides the number of OFDM symbols that are used for PDCCH at the beginning of a subframe e PHICH The PHICH carries the hybrid ARQ ACK NACK Multiple PHICHs mapped to the same set of resource elements are a PHICH group The PHICHs within one group are separated by different orthogonal sequences For the PHICH the Channel Decoder provides the ACK NACK pattern for the PHICH group and the relative power for each PHICH in the PHICH group Each line in the result table represents one PHICH group The columns on the left show the ACK NACK pattern of the PHICH group The columns on the right show the rel ative powers for each PHICH If a PHICH is not transmitted the table contains a sign Otherwise the ACK NACK pattern is either a 1 acknowledgement or a 0 not acknowledged The relative power is a numeric value in dB e PDCCH For each PDCCH that has been detected the Channel Decoder shows several results Each line in the table represents one PDCCH RNTI DCI Format Shows the Downlink Control Information DCI format
173. f C P and S may occur SCPI Command SENSe SYNC STATe on page 150 e Master Ref Level Shows the reference level of the master analyzer e Capture Time Frame Shows the capture length in ms User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 27 Configuring the Software 2 5 Configuring the Software This chapter contains information about general software functionality 2 5 1 Configuring the Display The Display menu contains functionality to improve the display and documentation of results P Press the DISP key The application features four screens or result displays Each of the screens may contain a different result display The number of visible screens depends on the screen layout Full screen mode In full screen mode the application shows the contents a single screen gt Press the Full Screen softkey If you have configured more than one result displays these are still working in the background Split screen mode In split screen mode the application shows the contents of two screens either screen A and screen B or screen C and screen D P Press the Split Screen softkey If you have configured more than two result displays these are still working in the background 2x2 split screen mode In 2x2 split screen mode the application shows the contents of four screens P Press the 2x2 Split Screen softkey Limitations For the Spectrum Emission Mask ACLR Time Alignment and On Off Power mea
174. for evalua tion The number of items depends on the number of antennas you have selected in the DUT MIMO Configuration dropdown menu Antenna 1 corresponds to APO Antenna 2 corresponds to AP1 Antenna 3 corresponds to AP2 Antenna 4 corresponds to AP3 If you select the Auto menu item the software identifies which antennas transmit the cell specific reference signals and selects them for the measurement The antenna you have selected is also the reference antenna for Time Alignment measurements Note that the DUT MIMO Configuration and the Tx Antenna Selection are the same as in the Downlink Signal Characteristics tab gt Demod Settings if you change them in one place they are also changed in the other For more information on MIMO measurements see chapter 8 4 MIMO Measurement Guide on page 130 The Num of Input Channels defines the number of UO streams to capture The soft ware allows you to record up to 8 I Q data streams You can capture the data from oscilloscope s or spectrum analyzer s or a combination of both Depending on the number of input channels you have selected the software adjusts the size of the Ana lyzer Configuration table Note Time Alignment measurements with more than one carrier La Carrier Aggrega tion also expand the size of the table because more than one input channel is neces sary for this task The number of input channels you have selected also affects the conten
175. frequency reference level used by analyzer 3 to 20 dBm CONFigure POWer EXPected IQ instrument lt RefLevel gt This command defines the reference level when the input source is baseband Parameters lt RefLevel gt lt numeric value gt Range 31 6 mV to 5 62 V RST 1V Default unit V Example CONF POW EXP IQ2 3 61 Sets the baseband reference level used by analyzer 2 to 3 61 V INPut lt n gt ATTenuation lt instrument gt lt Attenuation gt This command sets the RF attenuation level Parameters lt Attenuation gt lt numeric value gt RST 5 dB Default unit dB Example INP ATT 10 Defines an RF attenuation of 10 dB 9 7 1 4 Remote Commands to Configure General Settings DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet lt Attenuation gt This command selects the external attenuation or gain applied to the RF signal Parameters lt Attenuation gt lt numeric value gt RST 0 Default unit dB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10 Sets an external attenuation of 10 dB Configuring the Data Capture SENSe SWEep TIME eee tetetntete t anian tete tese ss 0d 185 SENSe L TE FRAMe COUNCESTATe ect te ettet tetti 185 SENSe LTE FRAMe COUNt tette tnter teet teet t tents 185 ISENSeILTEIERAMeCOUNEAUTO tette teens tette ttt nsns 186 ISENSSIEETEEFRAMG SGOOUDL EE 186 SENSe SWEep TIME lt CaptLength gt This command sets the
176. from the UE UE capabili ties and buffer status e Link adaptation Link adaptation is already known from HSDPA as adaptive modulation and coding Also in EUTRA modulation and coding for the shared data channel is not fixed but rather is adapted according to radio link quality For this purpose the UE regularly reports channel quality indications CQI to the eNodeB e Hybrid automatic repeat request ARQ Downlink hybrid ARQ is also known from HSDPA It is a retransmission protocol The UE can request retransmissions of incorrectly received data packets 1 3 References 1 3GPP TS 25 913 Requirements for E UTRA and E UTRAN Release 7 2 3GPP TR 25 892 Feasibility Study for Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing OFDM for UTRAN enhancement Release 6 3 3GPP TS 36 211 v8 3 0 Physical Channels and Modulation Release 8 References 4 3GPP TS 36 300 E UTRA and E UTRAN Overall Description Stage 2 Release 8 5 3GPP TS 22 978 All IP Network AIPN feasibility study Release 7 6 3GPP TS 25 213 Spreading and modulation FDD 7 Speth M Fechtel S Fock G and Meyr H Optimum Receiver Design for Wire less Broad Band Systems Using OFDM Part IEEE Trans on Commun Vol 47 1999 No 11 pp 1668 1677 8 Speth M Fechtel S Fock G and Meyr H Optimum Receiver Design for OFDM Based Broadband Transmission Part Il A Case Study IEEE Trans on Com mun Vol 49 2001 No 4 pp 571 578
177. g the Input The input settings control the basic configuration of the input The input source selection is part of the General Settings tab of the General Set tings dialog box For more information on advanced input configuration see chapter 4 5 Advanced Set tings on page 84 rs User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 69 Configuring the Measurement General Analyzer Config MIMO Setup Trigger Spectrum Advanced Input Source fie x Selec tg the Tee 70 Selecting the Input Source The input source selects the source of the data you d like to analyze You can either analyze a live signal or a signal that has been recorded previously and whose charac teristics have been saved to a file You can select the input source from the Source dropdown menu e RF Captures and analyzes the data from the RF input of the spectrum analyzer in use e Baseband BB Captures and analyzes the data from the baseband input of the spectrum analyzer in use Note that you have to use an analyzer that supports analog baseband input if you select that input source e Digital UO Captures and analyzes the data from the digital baseband input of the spectrum analyzer in use Note that you have to use an analyzer that supports digital baseband input if you select that input source e File Analyzes data that has been recorded already and has been saved to a file If selected the software asks you to select a file from a dialog box after you have
178. ge RESUIE sees 178 CALOCulate n LIMit k SUMMary EVM PSIGnal MAXimum RESUIt sese 179 CALCulate n LIMit k SUMMary EVM PSIGnal AVERage RESUIt sss 179 CALCulate n LIMit k SUMMary EVM ALL MAXimum RESUIt esee 177 CALCulate n LIMit k SUMMary EVM ALL AVERage RESUIt sese 177 CAL CGulate nzLUlMitck GUMManv FERbor MA Ximum RE Gu 179 CALCulate n LIMit k SUMMary FERRor AVERage RESUIt esee 179 CALCulate n LIMit k SUMMary GIMBalance MAXimum RESUIt esee 180 CALCulate n LIMit k SUMMary GIMBalance AVERage RESUIt eee 180 CAL Culate nz UMitczks SUMMarv IOOFtserMANimum RE Gu 180 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMary QOFfset AVERage RESult CALCulate n LIMit k SUMMary QUADerror MAXimum RESUIt essen 180 CALCulate n LIMit k SUMMary QUADerror AVERage RESUIt eene 180 CALCulate n LIMit k SUMMary SERRor MAXimum RESUIt esee 181 CALCulate n LIMit k SUMMary SERRor AVERage RESUIt sse 181 CALCulate n MARKer m FUNCtion POWer RESUult CURRent eene 175 CALibration PHASe GENGrFale o io Seed exert LA eek EY OE Der eet ege 149 CALibration PHASe LOAD GONFigure ACONfigsinstrument ADDRGSS
179. ggregation PDSCH Start Offset Common D For cross scheduled UEs the PDSCH start offset for the secondary carrier is usually not defined for each subframe individually but is constant over several subframes In case the control channel region of the secondary component carrier is longer than the PDSCH start offset you have defined for the primary carrier PDSCH resource ele ments might be overwritten by the resource elements of the control channel Note that the bit stream result displays labels these resource element with a sign Remote command CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt PSOFfset on page 213 Defining Advanced Signal Characteristics The downlink advanced signal characteristics contain settings that describe the detailed structure of a downlink LTE signal You can find the advanced signal characteristics in the Demod Settings dialog box e Configuring the Synchronization Gional 105 e Configuring the Reference Signal eret tr netto et e tt e nont et 106 e Configuring Positioning Reference Signals cette 106 e Configuring Channel State Information Reference Signal 108 e Defining the PDSCH Resource Block Symbol Offset AAA 110 Configuring the Control Cbannels acus cete de eren eret n ea Een en Ries 110 e Configuring the Shared Channel 115 Configuring the Synchronization Signal The synchronization sig
180. gnitude EVM for all resource blocks that can be occupied by the PDSCH The results are based on an average EVM that is calculated over all resource elements in the resource block This average resource block EVM is determined for each ana lyzed subframe If you analyze all subframes the result display contains three traces e Average EVM This trace shows the resource block EVM averaged over all subframes e Minimum EVM This trace shows the lowest average resource block EVM that has been found over the analyzed subframes e Maximum EVM This trace shows the highest average resource block EVM that has been found over the analyzed subframes If you select and analyze one subframe only the result display contains one trace that shows the resource block EVM for that subframe only Average minimum and maxi mum values in that case are the same For more information see Subframe Selection on page 75 The x axis represents the PDSCH resource blocks On the y axis the EVM is plotted either in or in dB depending on the EVM Unit Selection Antenna 1 Remote command Selecting the result display CALCulate lt n gt FEED EVM EVRP Querying results TRACe DATA EVM vs Subframe Starts the EVM vs Subframe result display This result display shows the Error Vector Magnitude EVM for each subframe You can use it as a debugging technique to identify a subframe whose EVM is too high The result is an average over all subcarrier
181. h symbol a cyclic prefix CP is appended as guard time compare figure 1 1 sm depends on the cyclic prefix length The generic frame structure with normal cyclic prefix length contains s 7 symbols This translates into a cyclic prefix length of Tce 5 2us for the first symbol and Tcp74 7ps for the remaining 6 symbols Additionally an extended cyclic prefix is defined in order to cover large cell scenarios with higher delay spread and MBMS transmission The generic frame structure with extended cyclic prefix of Tcp gz16 7us contains A 6 OFDM symbols subcarrier spacing 15 kHz The generic frame 1 2 3 1 2 4 Long Term Evolution Downlink Transmission Scheme structure with extended cyclic prefix of Top 33 3us contains sm 3 symbols sub carrier spacing 7 5 kHz table 1 1 gives an overview of the different parameters for the generic frame structure Table 1 1 Parameters for Downlink Generic Frame Structure Configuration Number of Symbols Cyclic Prefix Cyclic Prefix NG fro Length in Sam Length in us ples Normal cyclic prefix Af 15 kHz 7 160 for first symbol 5 2 us for first sym 144 for other sym bol bols 4 7 us for other symbols Extended cyclic prefix Af 15 kHz 6 512 16 7 us Extended cyclic prefix Af 7 5 kHz 3 1024 33 3 us Downlink Data Transmission Data is allocated to the UEs in terms of resource blocks A physical resource block consists of 12 24 consecutive subcarriers in th
182. ier measurement Note that PDSCH allocations will overwrite the positioning reference signal if they share a common resource block The positioning reference signal settings are part of the Downlink Advanced Signal Characteristics tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box Downlink Demodulation Settings Downlink Signal Characteristics Downlink Advanced Signal Characteristics M Positioning Reference Signals Settings Present Iw Configuration Index Io Rel Power oog Bandwidth 1 4 MHz 6 RB v Num Subfames N_PRS 1 Frame Number Offst 0 ip E E E E E E T 107 GE Ui DE 107 Configuration Ino RE Ce 107 Num Subframes NPS entiers nrbe e te et eco enc e reet irte re debis 107 Relative Power Positioning Reference Signal sss 108 Frame Number Offeet rtr dedere E rue taduex Manutan 108 Present Turns the positioning reference signal on and off Remote command CONFigure LTE DL PRSS STATe on page 215 Bandwidth Defines the bandwidth and thus the number of resource blocks the positioning refer ence signal occupies Note that the PRS bandwidth has to be smaller than the channel bandwidth Remote command CONFigure LTE DL PRSS BW on page 215 Configuration Index Defines the PRS Configuration Index lpgs as defined in 3GPP TS 36 211 table 6 10 4 3 1 Remote command CONFigure LTE DL PRSS CI on page 215 Num Subframes N PRS Defines the number
183. if the capture time is less than 20 1 ms Parameters lt Subframes gt ALL Analyzes all subframes of a frame 10 lt numeric value gt Number of subframes that the software analyzes Range 1 to 9 RST ALL Example FRAM SCO 3 Analyzes three subframes 9 7 1 5 Configuring Measurement Results UNIT EMM EE 187 ONI en KEE 187 INI SC ANG EET TEE 187 Remote Commands to Configure General Settings SENSe EETETEAN Tenna SEL LEtra uiuere cere gk de REENEN ENEE e ia 187 ISBNSeIEETEESODRGG SEL Gets teneo dite e en nod ahi iae eere da 188 SENSe EETEESUBFtame SELgol 2 dane Lenin Linien tbe terea abre ege EEEE EEN AA EEN 188 mm n UNIT EVM Unit This command selects the EVM unit Parameters Unit DB EVM results returned in dB PCT EVM results returned in 96 RST PCT Example UNIT EVM PCT EVM results to be returned in 96 UNIT BSTR Unit This command selects the way the bit stream is displayed Parameters Unit SYMbols Displays the bit stream using symbols BITs Displays the bit stream using bits RST SYMbols Example UNIT BSTR BIT Bit stream gets displayed using Bits UNIT CAXes Unit This command selects the scale of the x axis for result displays that show subcarrier results Parameters Unit CARR Shows the number of the subcarriers on the x axis HZ Shows the frequency of the subcarriers on the x axis Example UNIT CAX HZ Select
184. ights Phase eese 64 Channel Bandwidth sssssssssseeeeenee 95 Channel decoder results sssssssssseee 58 Channel Estimation cccccccsssscsecceesssssessecesensssseensees 91 Channel flatness ect Dern tret 50 Channel flatness difference sirrinin 51 Channel flatness group delay ssssseesssess Configurable Subframes 2 Configuration T able encre tte hn Constellation diagratm 2 rtt Constellation Selection CSI RS Weights Magnitude CSI RS Weights Phase AAA D Digital Input Data Rate DIG oae erede tn orien ma at ebat oni teet ev dne E Error in Subframaes oionn 99 EVM Calculation Method 92 EVM vs Carrier 40 EVM vs RB 43 EVM vs subframe 43 EVM vs symbol 41 lee E d E 42 External Attenuation rica rentas saca cran rac 72 F Dicen 69 Frequency error vs symbol Full Scale Level H Header Table iii tee ert cipe erre EEN 27 Horme base statlon ite tcn 83 l Identity Physical Layer AA 98 Input Source xm IER ACC mE L LOW TT 86 M Measurement er 47 alloc ID vs sym X catrier ones 57 allocation summary D Beamform Allocation Summary 63 beamforming reete enr t ree reet 60 bit stream DO capture buffer 34 CODE ess 54
185. iguration This command selects the length of the control data region in an MBSFN subframe Parameters Configuration 1 The first symbol in a subframe carries data of the control chan nel 2 The first two symbols in a subframe carries data of the control channel Example CONF DL MBSF AI NMRL 2 Selects two symbols that carry control channel data CONFigure LTE DL MBSFn POWer Power This command defines the relative power of the MBSFN transmission Parameters Power RST 0 dB Default unit DB Example CONF DL MBSF POW 1 5 Defines a relative power of 1 5 dB CONFigure LTE DL MBSFn STATe State This command includes or excludes an MBSFN from the test setup Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF 9 8 4 2 9 9 Configuring the Software Example CONF DL MBSF STAT ON Includes an MBSFN in the test setup MBSFN Subframe Confiuration CONFigure LTE DL MBSFn SUBFrame ssubframe PMCH MODuUlation 225 CONFiouret LTE D M n SUDBtrame subframe DMCH STATe 225 CONFigure LTE DL MBSFn SUBFrame ssubframe STATe esee 225 CONFigure LTE DL MBSFn SUBFrame lt subframe gt PMCH MODulation lt Modulation gt This command selects the modulation type for an MBSFN subframe Parameters lt Modulation gt QPSK QAM16 QAM64 QAM256 RST QPSK Example CONF DL MBSF SUBF2 PMCH MOD QPSK Selects QPSK modulation for the second subframe CON
186. imbalance can be written as re rni6 j038 8 5 where s t is the transmit signal r t is the received signal and and Q are the weight ing factors We define that I 1 and Q 1 AQ The UO imbalance estimation makes it possible to evaluate the modulator gain balance 1 AQ 8 6 and the quadrature mismatch arg 1 AQ 8 7 based on the complex valued estimate 4 Other measurement variables Without going into detail the EUTRA LTE downlink measurement application addition ally provides the following results e Total power e Constellation diagram e Group delay e Q offset e Crest factor e Spectral flatness 8 4 MIMO Measurement Guide Performing MIMO measurements requires additional equipment that allows you to cap ture multiple data streams e Several signal analyzers the number depending on the number of data streams you have to capture Alternatively you can use an oscilloscope with multiple channels the number of channels also depending on the number of data streams you have to capture R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurement Basics e Atleast one analyzer equipped with option R amp S FS x K102 PC that unlocks MIMO functionality True MIMO measurements are useful to verifiy MIMO precoding implementations for setups where it is not possible to decode the transmit data using only one antenna e g applying spatial multiplexing MIMO precoding with more than 1 layer and to mea sure the hardware
187. ink Signal Demodulation 5 Demod Settings 5 1 The following chapter contains all settings that are available in the Demodulation Set tings dialog box e Configuring Downlink Signal Demodulation esee 89 e Defining Downlink Signal Charachertstce AA 95 e Defining Advanced Signal Characteristics 105 e Defining MBSFN Characteristics eene 116 Configuring Downlink Signal Demodulation The downlink demodulation settings contain settings that describe the signal process ing and the way the signal is measured You can find the demodulation settings in the Demod Settings dialog box e Selecting the Demodulation Method EE 89 e Configuring Multicarrier Base Stations essen 90 e Configuring Parameter ESMAO etc etae er rte y be tte e petet d ser 91 e Compensating Signal ErfOrs ceste eie iid c 91 e Configuring EVM Meaeurements nennen nnne 92 e Processing Demodulated Data 93 e QGotnfiduring MIMO Setups tento et aee Ene ense ee tue 94 Selecting the Demodulation Method The PDSCH demodulation settings contain settings that describe the way the PDSCH is demodulated during measurements The demodulation settings are part of the Downlink Demodulation Settings tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box Downlink Demodulation Settings Downlink Signal Characteristics Downlink Advanced Signal Characteristics Demodulation Auto PDSCH Demodulation P
188. introduction of HSPA the evolution of UMTS has not reached its end HSPA will bring significant enhancements in 3GPP Release 7 The objective is to enhance the performance of HSPA based radio networks in terms of spectrum efficiency peak data rate and latency and to exploit the full potential of WCDMAbased 5 MHz operation Important features of HSPA are downlink multiple input multiple out put MIMO higher order modulation for uplink and downlink improvements of layer 2 protocols and continuous packet connectivity In order to ensure the competitiveness of UMTS for the next 10 years and beyond concepts for UMTS long term evolution LTE have been investigated The objective is a high data rate low latency and packet optimized radio access technology There fore a study item was launched in 3GPP Release 7 on evolved UMTS terrestrial radio access EUTRA and evolved UMTS terrestrial radio access network EUTRAN LTE EUTRA will then form part of 3GPP Release 8 core specifications This introduction focuses on LTE EUTRA technology In the following the terms LTE or EUTRA are used interchangeably In the context of the LTE study item 3GPP work first focused on the definition of requirements e g targets for data rate capacity spectrum efficiency and latency Also commercial aspects such as costs for installing and operating the network were considered Based on these requirements technical concepts for the air interface transmission
189. ion dialog box The ideal points for the selected modulation scheme are displayed for reference purpo ses User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 52 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays eS SE EEE EE EEE EE EEE EEE ES SE EE EE ee Constellation Diagram Points Meas Selection Antenna 1 2 LE s e vy Lu Hj l1 CS 8 be Pushes E am GR E 0 Real Part The constellation diagram also contains information about the current evaluation range In addition it shows the number of points that are displayed in the diagram Remote command Selecting the result display CALCulate lt n gt FEED CONS CONS Querying results TRACe DATA Evaluation Range for the Constellation Diagram The Evaluation Range dialog box defines the type of constellation points that are dis played in the Constellation Diagram By default the software displays all constellation points of the data that have been eval uated However you can filter the results by several aspects Constellation Diagram Constellation Diagram Modulation ALL ivi Modulation ALL Ji Allocation ALL i Allocation ALL v Symbol ALL ind Symbol ALL ivi Carrier ALL Ba Codeword ALL x Location Before MIMO CDMA decoder anten v Location After MIMO CDM decoder ind Fig 3 4 Evaluation range for constellations before and after MIMO decoding e Modulation Filters the resu
190. ion x PDSCH Reference Data Auto Detect D EVM Calculation tree DEE 92 PDSGH Reference Dala cedere dte tina a eed v dun e OT e dn 93 EVM Calculation Method Selects the method to calculate the EVM e EVM 3GPP Definition Calculation of the EVM according to 3GPP TS 36 141 Evaluates the EVM at two trial timing positions and then uses the maximum EVM of the two Configuring Downlink Signal Demodulation e At Optimal Timing Position Calculates the EVM using the optimal timing position Remote command SENSe LTE DL DEMod EVMCalc on page 202 PDSCH Reference Data Selects the type of reference data to calculate the EVM for the PDSCH e Auto detect Automatically identifies the reference data for the PDSCH by analyzing the signal e AllO E TM Sets the PDSCH reference data to a fixed value of 0 This value is according to the test model definition To get valid results you have to use a DUT that transmits an all zero data vector This setting is a good way if you are expecting signals with a high EVM because the automatic detection will not be reliable in that case Remote command SENSe LTE DL DEMod PRData on page 202 Processing Demodulated Data The demodulated data settings contain settings that control the way the software han dles demodulated data The demodulated data settings are part of the Downlink Demodulation Settings tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box Downlink Demodula
191. iori oett dd 34 e Measuring the Error Vector Magnitude EVM eee 40 e Measuring the Spectrum aacieeesseccsceecenene keen tk epe hus s nn ie ER Enna th LLR Rn antea RSS 45 e Measuring the Symbol Constellation esee tenenti tecene 52 e Measuring Statistics ia tee tec eta Lene RO PESE REG EEE 54 e Maeasunng Besmrortjill aceto reet ri tert i n todo notera desde est 60 9GPP Test SOGITREIDS o oL coron entgehen eer pendit xu ee ud 66 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays 3 1 Numerical Results Result Summary The Result Summary shows all relevant measurement results in numerical form com bined in one table gt Press the Display List Graph softkey so that the List element turns green to view the Result Summary Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TABLe on page 148 Contents of the result summary Result Summary Selection Antenna 1 Mean Mean Limit Max Max Limit 123 97 en mn men E nn 1 Ao an dp o The table is split in two parts The first part shows results that refer to the complete frame For each result the minimum mean and maximum values are displayed It also indicates limit check results where available The font of Pass results is green and that of Fail results is red By default the software checks the limits defined by the standard You can also import customized limits In that case the soft
192. l duration all resource element groups of the PHICH are allocated on the first OFDM symbol With an extended duration the resource element groups of the PHICH are distributed over three OFDM symbols for a normal subframe or over two symbols within a special subframe If you select Auto the duration of PHICH is automatically determined and based on the PBCH decoding results Note that you have to turn on the PBCH for an automatic detetemination of the PHICH duration Remote command CONFigure LTE DL PHICh DURation on page 220 PHICH TDD m_i 1 E TM Turns the special setting of the PHICH for the enhanced test models on and off Defining Advanced Signal Characteristics The special setting is defined in 36 141 V9 0 0 6 1 2 6 For frame structure type 2 the factor m_i shall not be set as per TS36 211 Table 6 9 1 but instead shall be set to m_i 1 for all transmitted subframes The parameter is available if you have selected TDD Remote command CONFigure LTE DL PHICh MITM on page 221 PHICH N_g Sets the variable Nog N in combination with the number of resource blocks defines the number of PHICH groups in a downlink subframe The standard specifies several values for N that you can select from the dropdown menu If you need a customized configuration you can set the number of PHICH groups in a subframe by selecting the Custom menu item and set a number of PHICH groups directly with PHICH Number of Groups
193. le lt subframe gt lt RNTI gt DCI format PDCCH format lt CCE offset 4 of transmitted bits stream of binary numbers The values have no unit The stream of binary numbers is a list of binary numbers separated by comma The DCI format and PDCCH format are encoded For the code assign ment see chapter 9 6 1 30 Return Value Codes on page 170 PDSCH Returns the results for the PDSCH The results are made up out of five values for each line of the table lt subframe gt lt allocationID gt codeword lt of transmitted bits stream of binary numbers The values have no unit 9 6 1 10 9 6 1 11 9 6 1 12 Remote Commands to Read Trace Data The stream of binary numbers is a list of binary numbers separated by comma If the PDSCH could not be decoded the NAN is returned instead of the lt of transmitted bits The stream of binary numbers is not shown The allocationID and lt codeword gt are encoded For the code assignment see chapter 9 6 1 30 Return Value Codes on page 170 Channel and Spectrum Flatness For the Channel Flatness result display the command returns one value for each trace point relative power The unit is always dB The following parameters are supported e TRACE1 Returns the average power over all subframes e TRACE2 Returns the minimum power found over all subframes If you are analyzing a partic ular subframe it returns nothi
194. lexing you can also define the number of layers for any allocation and the codebook index The number of layers of an allocation in combination with the number of code words determines the layer mapping The available number of layers depends on the number of transmission antennas Thus the maximum number of layers you can select is eight M Codeword to Layer Mapping Layers Codewords ita C 21 Co cial cO 2722 C q2C 42606 s2C G2 2C B82 C The codebook index determines the precoding matrix The available number of indices depends on the number of transmission antennas in use The range is from 0 to 15 The software automatically selects the codebook index if you turn the Cyclic Delay Diversity CDD on Defining Downlink Signal Characteristics Spatial Multiplexing Settings Codebook Index Oe et or eo WO nar 2 NEUEN S85 H MEIN RER 8 ER MEINE Cyclic Delay Diversity CDD T Remote command CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt PRECoding SCHeme on page 212 CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt PRECoding CLMapping on page 211 CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt PRECoding CBINdex on page 211 CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt PRECoding CDD on page 212 Beamforming UE Spec RS Turns on the precoding for beamforming
195. lge 85 Swap UO Swaps the real I branch and the imaginary Q branch parts of the signal Remote command SENSe SWAPiq on page 196 File Source Offset Defines the location in an UO data file where the analysis starts Remote command INPut IQ FSOFfset on page 196 Configuring the Baseband Input The baseband settings contain settings that configure the baseband input The baseband settings are part of the Advanced tab of the General Settings dialog box General Analyzer Config MIMO Setup Trigger Spectrum Advanced Baseband Settings Input High Impedance a Input Balanced a Input Lowpass 1 Input Dithering C Fight unten 85 le 86 LOW NIIT eebe 86 I g E 86 High Impedance Selects the impedance of the baseband input By default high impedance is off the impedance is 50 O If you turn the high impedance on the impedance changes to 1 kO or 1 MO depend ing on the configuration of the analyzer High impedance is available for a baseband input source Remote command INPut IQ IMPedance on page 196 4 5 3 4 5 4 Advanced Settings Balanced Turns symmetric or balanced input on and off If active a ground connection is not necessary If you are using an assymetrical unbalanced setup the ground connection runs through the shield of the coaxial cable that is used to connect the DUT Balancing is available for a baseband input source Remote command INPut IQ BALanced STATe on
196. locks assigned to the current PDSCH allocation e Rel Power dB Shows the relative power of the allocation Note that no power is calculated for the PHICH if Boosting Estimation has been turned on For more information see PHICH Rel Power e Modulation Shows the modulation type e Power per RE dBm Shows the power of each resource element in dBm e EVM Shows the EVM of the allocation The unit depends on your selection Note PDSCH allocation with beamforming The allocation summary shows two entries for a PDSCH allocation that uses Beam forming UE spec RS as the precoding method The second entry shows the measurement results of the UE specific reference signal Remote command Selecting the result display CALCulate lt n gt FEED STAT ASUM Querying results TRACe DATA Bit Stream Starts the Bit Stream result display This result display shows the demodulated data stream for each data allocation Depending on the Bit Stream Format the numbers represent either bits bit order or symbols symbol order User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 56 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays Selecting symbol format shows the bit stream as symbols In that case the bits belong ing to one symbol are shown as hexadecimal numbers with two digits In the case of bit format each number represents one raw bit Symbols or bits that are not transmitted are represented by a If a symbol could not be decoded because the
197. lts to include only the selected type of modulation e Allocation Filters the results to include only a particular type of allocation e Symbol Filters the results to include only a particular OFDM symbol Filtering by OFDM symbols is available for constellations created before MIMO decoding e Carrier Filters the results to include only a particular subcarrier Filtering by carrier is available for constellations created before MIMO decoding e Symbol Filters the results to include only a particular codeword symbol SE User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 53 Measuring Statistics Filtering by codeword symbols is available for constellations created after MIMO decoding e Codeword Filters the results to include only a particular codeword Filtering by codeword is available for constellations created after MIMO decoding e Location Selects the point in the signal processing at which the constellation diagram is cre ated before or after the MIMO encoding In case of spatial multiplexing symbols of different encoding schemes are merged in the MIMO encoder Thus you get a mix of different modulation alphabets When you filter these symbols to show a modulation MIXTURE you get the mixed sym bols only if you have selected the Before MIMO CDMA Decoder option Note that the PHICH is CDMA encoded Thus the constellation points for the PHICH are either created before or after CDMA encoding If you have selected After MIMO CDMA Decoder filtering
198. mand RF attenuation INPut lt n gt ATTenuation lt instrument gt on page 184 External attenuation DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 185 4 1 4 Configuring the Data Capture The data capture settings contain settings that control the amount of data and the way that the software records the LTE signal The data capture settings are part of the General Settings tab of the General Set tings dialog box General Analyzer Config MIMO Setup Trigger Spectrum Advanced Data Capture Settings Capture Time 20 10 ms Overall Frame Count Iw Num of Frames to Analyze em Auto Acc to Standard Iw Max Num of Subframes per Frame to Analyze ALL Es Capture EN SE MM 73 Overall E Ne EE 73 Number of Frames to Analyze tercer redi te ree 73 Aute According to Stnd EE 73 Maximum Number of Subframes per Frame to Analvze AAA 74 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC General Settings Capture Time Defines the capture time The capture time corresponds to the time of one sweep Hence it defines the amount of data the software captures during one sweep By default the software captures 20 1 ms of data to make sure that at least one com plete LTE frame is captured in one sweep The software shows the current capture time including the frame number in the header table Capture Time Frame Remote command SENSe SWEep TIME on page 185
199. mission between the LTE measurement application and the remote client Supported formats are ASCII or REAL32 Parameters Format ASCii REAL RST ASCii Example FORM REAL The software will send binary data in Real32 data format MMEMory LOAD DEModsetting Path This command restores previously saved demodulation settings The file must be of type allocation and depends on the link direction that was cur rently selected when the file was saved You can load only files with correct link direc tions Setting parameters Path String containing the path and name of the file Managing Files Example MMEM LOAD DEM D USER Settingsfile allocation Usage Setting only MMEMory LOAD IQ STATe lt Path gt This command restores UO data from a file Setting parameters lt Path gt String containing the path and name of the source file Example MMEM LOAD IQ STAT C R_S Instr user data ig tar Loads UO data from the specified file Usage Setting only MMEMory LOAD TMOD DL lt TestModel gt This command loads an EUTRA test model E TM The test models are in accordance with 3GPP TS 36 141 Setting parameters lt TestModel gt E TM1_1__20MHz EUTRA Test Model 1 1 E TM1 1 E ETM1 2 20MHz EUTRA Test Model 1 2 E TM1 2 E TM2__20MHz EUTRA Test Model 2 E TM2 E TM3 1 20MHz EUTRA Test Model 3 1 E TM3 1 E TM3 2 20MHz EUTRA Test Model 3 2 E TM3 2 E TM3 3 20MHz
200. mmand queries the EVM of all resource elements Return values lt EVM gt lt numeric value gt Minimum maximum or average EVM depending on the last command syntax element The unit is or dB depending on your selection Example FETC SUMM EVM Returns the mean value Remote Commands to Read Numeric Results Usage Query only FETCh SUMMary EVM DSQP MAXimum FETCh SUMMary EVM DSQP MINimum FETCh SUMMary EVM DSQP AVERage This command queries the EVM of all resource elements of the PDSCH with a QPSK modulation Return values lt EVM gt lt numeric value gt EVM in or dB depending on the unit you have set Example FETC SUMM EVM DSQP Returns the PDSCH QSPK EVM Usage Query only FETCh SUMMary EVM DSST MAXimum FETCh SUMMary EVM DSST MINimum FETCh SUMMary EVM DSST AVERage This command queries the EVM of all resource elements of the PDSCH with a 16QAM modulation Return values lt EVM gt lt numeric value gt EVM in or dB depending on the unit you have set Example FETC SUMM EVM DSST Returns the PDSCH 16QAM EVM Usage Query only FETCh SUMMary EVM DSSF MAXimum FETCh SUMMary EVM DSSF MINimum FETCh SUMMary EVM DSSF AVERage This command queries the EVM of all resource elements of the PDSCH with a 64QAM modulation Return values lt EVM gt lt numeric value gt EVM in or dB depending on the unit you have set Example FETC SUMM EVM DSSF Returns the
201. n from transmission to reception is an issue in TDD systems Therefore the measurement is available for TDD signals The measurement is designed to verify if the signal intervals during which no downlink signal is transmitted reception or off periods complies with the limits defined by 3GPP Because the transition from transmission on periods to reception has to be very fast in order to efficiently use the resources 3GPP has also defined limits for the transient periods The limits for these are also verified by the measurement Note that the measurement works only if you are using the RF input When you start the measurement the software records new UO data instead of using the data other UO measurements are based on For more information on setting up the measurement see chapter 8 7 Performing Transmit On Off Power Measurements on page 140 The result display for the On Off Power measurement consists of numerical results and the graphic display of the signal characteristics Numerical results The upper part of the result display shows the results in numerical form Each line in the table shows the measurement results for one off period ON OFF Power Start OFF Falling Trans Rising Trans Per mit e Start OFF Period Limit Shows the beginning of the off period relative to the frame start 0 seconds e Stop OFF Period Limit Shows the end of the off period relative to the frame start 0 seconds The time from the
202. nal settings contain settings to describe the physical attributes and structure of the synchronization signal The synchronization signal settings are part of the Downlink Advanced Signal Charac teristics tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box Downlink Demodulation Settings Downlink Signal Characteristics Downlink Advanced Signal Characteristics M Synchronization Signal Settings P S SYNC Tx Antenna fal D P S SYNC Sequence Plrtemal S Internal P SYNC Rel Power 0 000 dB S SYNC Rel Power 0 000 dB PSY NG TX E EE 106 P SVING Relative POW Gi niece tee tees teneo a ccena e pee ei te cte caet aee zoe rra det Den cedes 106 S OVING Relative EE 106 3 2 5 3 3 Defining Advanced Signal Characteristics P S SYNC Tx Antenna Selects the antenna that transmits the synchronization signal P SYNC or S SYNC When selecting the antenna you implicitly select the synchronization method If the selected antenna transmits no synchronization signal the software uses the reference signal to synchronize Note that automatic cell ID detection is not available if synchroni zation is based on the reference signal Remote command CONFigure LTE DL CC cci SYNC ANTenna on page 214 P SYNC Relative Power Defines the power of the primary synchronization signal P SYNC relative to the refer ence signal Remote command CONFigure LTE DL SYNC PPOWer on page 214 S SYNC Relative Power Defines the po
203. need a trigger signal provided by the DUT or the signal generator The trigger signal has to be connected to all analyzers If you have several signal genera tors in the setup the master generator has to trigger the slave as well The 8 2 shows a MIMO setup with two or optional four analyzers and one or optional two signal generators with two channels M User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 131 MIMO Measurement Guide RF Master Analyzer REF OUT EXT TRIG IN EXT TRIG IN EXT TRIG IN 2 Channel Generator REF IN EXT TRIG EXT TRIG IN Fig 8 2 MIMO Hardware Setup You can use several trigger configurations with or without additional hardware Measurements with a delayed trigger signal Simultaneous capture of the UO data requires the trigger inputs of all instruments in the setup to be armed Arming a trigger does not happen immediately when you start a measurement but is delayed slightly for a number of reasons for example e Connecting several instruments with a LAN or GPIB connection usually causes a certain network delay e Tasks like the auto leveling function require some time to finish Because of these factors you have to make sure that the trigger event does not occur during this time frame You can do so for example by configuring an appropriate delay time on the DUT The exact delay depends on the GPIB or network condition and the input settings You can estimate th
204. new registered licenses For more infor mation see chapter 2 1 Licensing the Software on page 16 Check Licen Looks for all smartcards connected to the computer and returns their ses characteristics like the serial number of the smartcard or its device ID Note that the smartcard has to be connected to figure out its proper ties Enter License Opens an input field to manually enter a new license key code A key Key Code code consists of 30 digits Process Opens a dialog box to select a file xml format that contains a License File license Opening that file automatically adds a new license Configuring the Software Show Logging Opens a dialog box that contains a log of all messages that the software has shown in the status bar Use the message log for debugging purposes in case any errors occur You can refresh and clear the contents of the log or copy the contents of the system log to the clipboard Refresh Updates the contents of the log Clear All Deletes all entries in the log Copy to Clip Copies the contents of the log to the clipboard board System Info Opens a dialog box that contains information about the system like driver versions or the utility software You can use this information in case an analyzer does not work properly 3 Measurements and Result Displays The LTE measurement software features several measurements to examine and ana lyze different aspects of an LTE signal Th
205. nfigure the Demod ulation on page 199 GONFiguine NOGC EE 189 9 7 1 7 Remote Commands to Configure General Settings CONFigure NOCC lt Carriers gt This command selects the number of component carriers evaluated in the Time Align ment measurement Parameters lt Carriers gt 1 2 RST 1 Example CONF NOCC 2 Selects 2 carriers Configuring On Off Power Measurements SENSe ETEJ OOPower CAGGregalioh 2 22 22 122 nnii eana aie Se siu EAR 189 SENSe E TE OOPower FREQuency HIGHer eerie cecer a unen nn nani nn aa 189 SENSeIEETEF OOPowerF REQUOmGY EOWLF 2 cet itia e dre reae ade dds 190 SENSe EETEEOOPOwerNCORTrection 2 1 22 2 2 2 rrr ice i esee uvae bez PE Ea ANEN 190 GONFigure ETEFOOPOWeENFRalTIGS rerit oor abet educ eux euren tragen a ph iue 190 SENSe L TE OOPower CAGGregation lt NoiseCorrection gt This command turns carrier aggregation for Transmit On Off Power measurements on and off Parameters lt NoiseCorrection gt ON OFF RST OFF Example FREQ CENT 1GHZ Defines a center for the master component carrier of 1 GHz OOP CAGG ON OOP FREQ LOW 950MHZ OOP FREQ HIGH 1050MHZ Turns on carrier aggregation and defines a frequency band between 950 MHz and 1 05 GHz SENSe LTE 0OPower FREQuency HIGHer Frequency This command defines the higher edge frequency for Transmit On Off Power measure ments with
206. ng e TRACE3 Returns the maximum power found over all subframes If you are analyzing a par ticular subframe it returns nothing Channel and Spectrum Flatness Difference For the Channel Flatness Difference result display the command returns one value for each trace point relative power The unit is always dB The number of values depends on the selected LTE bandwidth The following parameters are supported e TRACE1 Returns the average power over all subframes e TRACE2 Returns the minimum power found over all subframes If you are analyzing a partic ular subframe it returns nothing e TRACE3 Returns the maximum power found over all subframes If you are analyzing a par ticular subframe it returns nothing Channel Group Delay For the Channel Group Delay result display the command returns one value for each trace point Remote Commands to Read Trace Data lt group delay gt The unit is always ns The number of values depends on the selected LTE bandwidth The following parameters are supported e TRACE1 Returns the group delay 9 6 1 13 Constellation Diagram For the Constellation Diagram the command returns two values for each constellation point lt I SFO Sym0 Carrier1 gt lt Q SFO Sym0 Carrier1 gt lt I SFO Sym0 Carrier n gt Q SFO SymO Car rier n I SFO Sym1 Carrier1 lt Q SFO Sym1 Carrier1 gt lt I SFO Sym1 Carrier n gt Q SFO Sym1 Ca
207. ng of 3GPP LTE MIMO signals on the downlink option FSx K103 PC enables testing of 3GPP MIMO signals on the uplink option FSx K104 PC enables testing of 3GPP LTE TDD signals on the downlink option FSx K105 PC enables testing of 3GPP LTE TDD signals on the uplink FDD and TDD are duplexing methods e FDD mode uses different frequencies for the uplink and the downlink e TDD mode uses the same frequency for the uplink and the downlink Downlink DL and Uplink UL describe the transmission path e Downlink is the transmission path from the base station to the user equipment The physical layer mode for the downlink is always OFDMA e Uplink is the transmission path from the user equipment to the base station The physical layer mode for the uplink is always SC FDMA The software shows the currently selected L TE mode including the bandwidth in the header table Ee Remote command Link direction CONFigure LTE LDIRection on page 182 Duplexing mode CONFigure LTE DUPLexing on page 182 Defining the Signal Frequency For measurements with an RF input source you have to match the center frequency of the analyzer to the frequency of the signal The software shows the current center frequency in the header table The available frequency range depends on the hardware configuration of the analyzer you are using Remote command Center frequency SENSe FREQuency CENTer CC cci on page 182 4 1 2 Configurin
208. nside an iq tar file Optionally an iq tar file can contain the following file e UO preview XSLT file Contains a stylesheet to display the UO parameter XML file and a preview of the UO data in a web browser Managing Frame Data For fast access to the frame description or structure of a signal you can save it and again use it at a later time To manage frame descriptions enter the file manager and select Save Demod Setup to save the current setup or Load Demod Setup to restore a previously created setup The frame decription contains the complete modulation structure of the signal Importing and Exporting Limits The frame structure is defined in the xml file format The file contains all parameters that are part of the demodulation settings If you want to define more than one alloca tion you can do so by adding additional PRB entries lt PRB gt element Note the following restrictions for the frame description e You have to define at least one PRB e You can allocate a maximum of four frames The example below shows a typical frame description FrameDefinition LinkDirection downlink TDDULDLAllocationConfiguration 0 DDSpecialSubframeConfiguration 0 RessourceBlocks 50 CP auto PSYNCBoostingdB 0 SYNCBoostingdB 0 PSSYNCTxAntenna All ReferenceSignalBoostingdB 0 BCHIsPresent true PBCHBoostingdB 0 PCFICHIsPresent true PCFICHBoostingdB 0 HICHTDDSetMiAccToETMs false NumberOfPDCCHs 0 PDCCHForm
209. nt results Possible units are dB and Remote command UNIT EVM on page 187 Bit Stream Format Selects the way the bit stream is displayed The bit stream is either a stream of raw bits or of symbols In case of the symbol for mat the bits that belong to a symbol are shown as hexadecimal numbers with two dig its Examples R amp S FS K100 102 104PC General Settings B Bit Stream S Allocation E Symbo Bit Stream 0 oi oo 00 00 01 01 OO 00 0 3 01 00 03 0 2 01 02 Oz 01 010 B Bit Stream Sub Allocatio Modulatio t Bit Stream frame 100000000100001000110000100111001010101100001101 01010110100111111011001 001001011011111100100110101001100110000000 3110001 100101000110100101111111010001011000111010110010 Fig 4 2 Bit stream display in downlink application if the bit stream format is set to bits Remote command UNIT BSTR on page 187 Carrier Axes Selects the scale of the x axis for result displays that show results of OFDM subcarri ers e X axis shows the frequency of the subcarrier wl d d Duch hh A e X axis shows the number of the subcarrier 100 Remote command UNIT CAXes on page 187 Subframe Selection Selects a particular subframe whose results the software displays You can select a particular subframe for the following measurements Result Summary EVM vs Carrier EVM vs Symbol EVM vs Symbol x Carrier Chan nel Flatness Channel Group Delay Channel Flatness Difference
210. number of layers exceeds the number of receive antennas the application shows a sign This is also the case if PDSCH resource elements are overwritten for any reason For more information see Overwrite PDSCH and Enhanced Settings Bit Stream Allocation Code Modulation Symbol ID word Index PBCH 1 1 0 01 00 0 Bit Stream PBCH 1 1 PBCH 1 1 m PBCH 1 1 PBCH 1 1 PBCH 1 1 o PBCH 1 1 PBCH 1 1 PBCH 1 1 m PBCH 1 1 The table contains the following information e Subframe Number of the subframe the bits belong to e Allocation ID Channel the bits belong to e Codeword Code word of the allocation e Modulation Modulation type of the channels e Symbol Index or Bit Index Shows the position of the table row s first bit or symbol within the complete stream e Bit Stream The actual bit stream Remote command Selecting the result display CALCulate lt n gt FEED STAT BSTR Querying results TRACe DATA Allocation ID vs Symbol x Carrier The Allocation ID vs Symbol X Carrier display shows the allocation ID of each carrier in each symbol of the received signal Each type of allocation is represented by a different color Use a marker to get more information about the type of allocation User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 57 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays Alloc ID s Symbol X Carrier mmm mmm 0 70 80 EI 100 110 Symbol Number Remote command
211. o customize in the Selected Subframe field Enter the number of the subframe starting with 0 The software updates the contents of the configuration table to the selected subframe Remote command Number of subframes CONFigure LTE DL CSUBframes on page 209 Number of allocations CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALCount on page 209 e POSCH Allocations E 100 e Ginen TC 102 5 2 4 1 Defining Downlink Signal Characteristics PDSCH Allocations In the default state each subframe contains one allocation Add allocations with the Used Allocations parameter The software expands the configuration table accord ingly with one row representing one allocation You can define a different number of allocations for each subframe you want to configure and configure up to 110 alloca tions in every subframe The configuration table contains the settings to configure the allocations ON QUIM 100 COGS VV ORG EE 100 ModUlatiOfi c eter cr trea t e e rtr ee o a er d rer pt ave ced eat 100 Enhanced de E 101 VRB GAD EE 101 Number OF EE 101 EEO Eeer 101 oM E aOwauaees 102 C onc M MET 102 ID N RNTI Selects the allocation s ID The ID corresponds to the N RNTI By default the software assigns consecutive numbers starting with 0 The ID or N RNTI is the user equipment identifier for the corresponding allocation and is a number in the range from 0 to 65535 The order of the numbers is irrelev
212. ocation that has been found lt Subframe gt lt AllocationID gt lt Phase gt lt PhaseDifference gt The unit for lt Phase gt and lt PhaseDifference gt is always degrees The lt Subframe gt has no unit The lt allocation ID gt is encoded For the code assignment see chapter 9 6 1 30 Return Value Codes on page 170 9 6 1 5 Bit Stream For the Bit Stream result display the command returns five values and the bitstream for each line of the table lt subframe gt lt allocation ID gt lt codeword gt lt modulation gt lt of symbols bits gt lt hexadecimal binary numbers gt All values have no unit The format of the bitstream depends on Bit Stream Format The allocation ID gt lt codeword gt and modulation are encoded For the code assignment see chapter 9 6 1 30 Return Value Codes on page 170 For symbols or bits that are not transmitted the command returns e FFF if the bit stream format is Symbols e 9 if the bit stream format is Bits For symbols or bits that could not be decoded because the number of layer exceeds the number of receive antennas the command returns e FFE if the bit stream format is Symbols e 8 if the bit stream format is Bits SSS gt SSS See User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 161 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Remote Commands Note that the data format of the return values is always ASCII Example Bit Stream Sub Allocation Code Modulation S
213. of an R amp S FSQ or R amp S FSG Follow these steps to figure out GPIB or IP address of an R amp S FSQ or R amp S FSG Figuring Out the GPIB address 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Press the General Setup softkey 3 Press the GPIB softkey The R amp S FSQ FSG opens a dialog box that shows its current GPIB address Connecting the Computer to an Analyzer Figuring Out the IP address 1 Press the SETUP key Press the General Setup softkey Press the Configure Network softkey e oO N Press the Configure Network softkey The MS Windows Network Connections dialog box opens 5 Select the Local Area Connection item The Local Area Connection Status dialog box opens 6 Select the Support tab The Support tab shows the current TCP IP information of the R amp S FSQ 4 Local Area Connection Status 2 3 2 2 Figuring Out the Address of an R amp S FSV or R amp S FSVR Follow these steps to figure out the GPIB or IP address of an R amp S FSV or R amp S FSVR Figuring Out the GPIB address 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Press the General Setup softkey 3 Press the GPIB softkey 4 Press the GPIB Address softkey The R amp S FSV R opens a dialog box that shows its current GPIB address GPIB Address X Figuring Out the IP address 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Press the General Setup softkey Connecting the Computer to an Analyzer 3 Press the Network Address softkey 4 Press the IP Address softke
214. of one of the R amp S analyzers d 9 2 1 Remote command examples Note that some remote command examples mentioned in this introductory chapter may not be supported by this application Long and Short Form The keywords have a long and a short form You can use either the long or the short form but no other abbreviations of the keywords The short form is emphasized in upper case letter Note however that this emphasis only serves the purpose to distinguish the short from the long form in the manual For the instrument the case does not matter 9 2 2 9 2 3 9 2 4 Introduction Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer is the same as SENS FREQ CENT Numeric Suffixes Some keywords have a numeric suffix if the command can be applied to multiple instances of an object In that case the suffix selects a particular instance e g a mea surement window Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets lt n gt next to the keyword If you don t use a suffix for keywords that support one it is treated as a 1 Example DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt ZOOM STATe enables the zoom in a particular mea surement window selected by the suffix at WINDow DISPlay WINDow4 ZOOM STATe ON refers to window 4 Optional Keywords Some keywords are optional and are only part of the syntax because of SCPI compli ance You can include them in the header or not Note that if an optional keyword has a numeric
215. ommand CONFigure LTE DL BF AP on page 150 3GPP Test Scenarios 3GPP defines several test scenarios for measuring base stations These test scenarios are described in detail in 3GPP TS 36 141 The following table provides an overview which measurements available in the LTE software are suited to use for the test scenarios in the 3GPP documents Table 3 1 Test scenarios for E TMs as defined by 3GPP 3GPP TS 36 141 Test Model Test scenario Test described in Measurement E TM1 1 Base station output power chapter 6 2 Power gt Result Summary Transmit On Off power chapter 6 4 On Off Power DL RS power chapter 6 5 4 RSTP gt Result Summary Time alignment chapter 6 5 3 Time Alignment Error Transmitter intermodulation chapter 6 7 ACLR Occupied bandwidth chapter 6 6 1 Occupied Bandwidth ACLR chapter 6 6 2 ACLR Test Model Test scenario Test described in 3GPP Test Scenarios Measurement Operating band unwanted emissions chapter 6 6 3 Spectrum Emission Mask Transmitter spurious emis sions chapter 6 6 4 Spurious Emissions E TM1 2 ACLR chapter 6 6 2 ACLR Operating band unwanted emissions chapter 6 6 2 Spectrum Emission Mask E TM2 RE power control dynamic range Frequency error chapter 6 3 1 chapter 6 5 1 Power results Frequency Error gt Result Summary Total power dynamic range chapter 6 3 2 OSTP gt Result Summary
216. on Antenna 1 OO PRE EERE EL ER EE TERETE RE RR DI EEE REOR ae 6 8 10 Time ms Fig 3 1 Capture buffer without zoom The bar at the bottom of the diagram represents the frame that is currently analyzed Different colors indicate the OFDM symbol type e E Indicates the data stream es C Indicates the reference signal and data e E Indicates the P SYNC and data a Indicates the S SYNC and data A blue vertical line at the beginning of the green bar in the Capture Buffer display rep resents the subframe start Additionally the diagram contains the Start Offset value This value is the time difference between the subframe start and capture buffer start When you zoom into the diagram you will see that the bar may be interrupted at cer tain positions Each small bar indicates the useful parts of the OFDM symbol H ENIN RAT S SYNC P SYNC DA 5 45 Time ms Fig 3 2 Capture buffer after a zoom has been applied to a downlink signal Remote command Selecting the result display CALCulate lt n gt FEED PVT CBUF Querying results TRACe DATA Querying the subframe start offset FETCh SUMMary TFRame on page 157 rer User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 35 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays SS SSE EE EE EE EEE EE EEE EE EEE ESE SS SE EEE EE EE SS Se Se On Off Power The On Off Power measurement shows the characteristics of an LTE TDD signal over time The transitio
217. on to All 8 7 Performing Transmit On Off Power Measurements e Note that the Time Alignment meaurement only evaluates the reference signal and therefore ignores any PDSCH settings for example it does not have an influence on this measurement if the PDSCH MIMO scheme is set to transmit diversity or spatial multiplexing Time Alignment measurements with carrier aggregation The test setup per component carrier is basically the same as measurements on a sin gle carrier You should however follow these guidelines for the best measurement results e Perform the measurement with an R amp S RTO Compared to an analyzer the oscil loscope yields more accurate results in this case e f you perform the measurement with two analyzers one analyzer is the master analyzer the other is the slave In that case use the External Reference to syn chronize the analyzers and use a trigger to make sure that the measurement starts at the same time on both analyzers For a more comprehensive description of this test setup see chapter 8 4 1 MIMO Measurements with Signal Analyzers on page 131 e Use acombiner to combine antennas for each carrier as shown in figure 8 8 Performing Transmit On Off Power Measurements The technical specification in 3GPP TS 36 141 prescribes the measurement of the transmitter OFF power and the transmitter transient period of an EUTRA LTE TDD base transceiver station BTS operating at its specified maximum output
218. or Auto 4 Antennas e All all available Tx antennas are measured and the antennas are assigned to the streams in ascending order e Auto the antenna assignment is automatically detected In case of Auto 2 Antennas two streams are captured In case of Auto 4 Antennas four streams are captured The signal level of each R amp S RTO input channel is measured and the reference level and attenuation settings are adjusted automatically If a manual setting is preferred and for speed optimization the automatic level adjustment can be disabled in the General tab of the General Settings dialog box 8 5 Calibrating Beamforming Measurements The quality of beamforming transmission depends on the phase characteristics of the transmission because phase errors lead to an incorrect beamforming pattern Thus measuring the phase difference between the transmit antennas is the most important task regarding beamforming The precision of beamforming phase measurements relies on the phase characteristics of the measurement equipment cables oscilloscope etc These phase characteris tics should be considered in the test setup otherwise measurement results could be affected by errors Therefore it is recommended to calibrate beamforming measure ments before performing the actual measurement and thus improve the precision of the measurement The software provides functionality that allows you to correct the measurement results by pha
219. ost if you turn the data points off in these result displays Zooming into the diagram area If you d like to see parts of the diagram area in more detail you can use the zoom gt Open the context menu and select the Zoom menu item The software opens a submenu with several zooming options Auto XY Default Zoom Fig 6 2 Zooming options e Zooming vertically and horizontally XY Click on any point in the diagram area and draw a rectangle with the mouse The rectangle defines the part of the diagram area you are zooming into e Zooming horizontally X Click on any point in the diagram area and define the horizontal section of the dia gram area you want to zoom into e Zooming vertically Y Click on any point in the diagram area and define the vertical section of the dia gram area you want to zoom into e Zooming automatically Auto XY Automatically scales the diagram area so that the complete trace data is visible Double clicking on the diagram has the same effect e Restoring the default zoom The Default Zoom entry restores the default zoom The software also provides functionality to restore the default Zoom each time when the results are refreshed gt Open the context menu and select the Default Zoom on Update menu item Panning the trace If you d like to see parts of the measurement results that are outside the diagram area you can move the contents of the diagram area To move the contents of the
220. ote command DUT MIMO configuration CONFigure LTE DL CC lt cci gt MIMO CONFig on page 208 TX antenna selection CONFigure LTE DL CC lt cci gt MIMO ASELection on page 208 Number of input channels CONFigure LTE NSOurces on page 191 UO data stream selection SENSe LTE SOURce SELect on page 188 4 3 Triggering Measurements MIMO Analyzer Configuration For a comprehensive description see chapter 2 3 Connecting the Computer to an Analyzer on page 19 Triggering Measurements The trigger settings contain settings that control triggered measurements You can select a trigger for any of the four possible analyzers in the measurement setup separately by selecting one of the analyzers from the dropdown menu next to the Trigger Settings label The trigger settings are part of the General Settings tab of the General Settings dia log box General Analyzer Config MIMO Setup Trigger Spectrum Advanced Trigger Settings Input Channel 1 e Trigger Mode extemal zl Trigger Offset 6s Trigger Slope Rising Ext Trigger Level IT 14v Trigger Port Potts Configuring the Trigger A trigger allows you to capture those parts of the signal that you are really interested in While the software runs freely and analyzes all signal data in its default state no mat ter if the signal contains information or not a trigger initiates a measurement only under certain circumstances th
221. ource elements Note that the bit stream result displays labels these resource ele ment with a sign Remote command CONFigure LTE DL CSIRs OPDSch on page 217 5 3 5 Defining the PDSCH Resource Block Symbol Offset PRB Symbol Offset PRB Symbol Offset specifies the symbol offset of the PDSCH allocations relative to the subframe start This setting applies to all subframes in a frame With this settings the number of OFDM symbols used for control channels is defined too For example if this parameter is set to 2 and the PDCCH is enabled the number of OFDM symbols actually used by the PDCCH is 2 Special control channels like the PCFICH or PHICH require a minimum number of con trol channel OFDM symbols at the beginning of each subframe If PRB Symbol Offset is lower than the required value the control channel data overwrites some resource elements of the PDSCH If Auto is selected the Control Region for PDCCH PRB Symbol Offset value is detec ted from the PCFICH For correct Demodulation of a 3GPP conform PCFICH signal the Scrambling of Coded Bits has to be enabled Remote command CONFigure LTE DL PSOFfset on page 222 5 3 6 Configuring the Control Channels The control channel settings contain settings that describe the physical attributes and structure of the control channel The control channel settings are part of the Downlink Advanced Signal Characteris tics tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box 5 3
222. ower is only hinted at not shown e Red lines Limits as defined by 3GPP In addition to these elements the diagram also shows the overall limit check see above the average count and the limit for the mean power spectral density Off Power Density Limit Adjust Timing If you are using an external trigger for the On Off power measurement you have to determine the offset of the trigger time to the time the LTE frame starts You can do this with the Adjust Timing function When the software has determined the offset it corrects the results of the On Off Power measurement accordingly Remote command Selecting the result display CALCulate lt n gt FEED PVT OOP Querying results TRACe DATA Querying limit check results CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt 00Power OFFPower on page 175 CALCulate n LIMit k OOPower TRANsient on page 176 SENSe LTE 00Power ATIMing on page 150 Power vs Symbol x Carrier The Power vs Symbol x Carrier shows the power for each carrier in each symbol The horizontal axis represents the symbols The vertical axis represents the carriers Different colors in the diagram area represent the power The color map for the power levels is provided above the diagram area SE User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 38 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays Power s Symbol X Carrier Selection Antenna 1 140 1 Power dBm 36 1 300 200 8 a 100 5 4 S be a
223. ownlink Signal Demodulation Downlink Demodulation Settings Downlink Signal Characteristics Downlink Advanced Signal Characteristics Tracking Phase Off e Timing a SH 92 d Bi UL EE 92 Phase Specifies whether or not the measurement results should be compensated for common phase error When phase compensation is used the measurement results will be com pensated for phase error on a per symbol basis Off Phase tracking is not applied Pilot Only Only the reference signal is used for the estimation of the phase error Pilot and Pay Both reference signal and payload resource elements are used for load the estimation of the phase error Remote command SENSe LTE DL TRACking PHASe on page 202 Timing Specifies whether or not the measurement results should be compensated for timing error When timing compensation is used the measurement results will be compensa ted for timing error on a per symbol basis Remote command SENSe LTE DL TRACking TIME on page 202 Configuring EVM Measurements The demodulation EVM settings contain settings that control the way the software cal culates EVM results The demodulation EVM settings are part of the Downlink Demodulation Settings tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box Downlink Demodulation Settings Downlink Signal Characteristics Downlink Advanced Signal Characteristics EVM EVM Calculation Method EVM 3GPP Definit
224. ows the location of the synchronization error in the signal processing For each synchronization block a bar is shown giving information about the reliability of the synchronization result If the level in the bar falls below the threshold indicated by the horizontal line the synchronization is marked as failed and the color of the bar changes from green to red When the synchronization of the block fails the complete block changes its color to red and all succeeding arrows change their color to red too t For more information see chapter 8 Measurement Basics on page 126 Signal Flow Remote command Allocation Summary Starts the Allocation Summary result display This result display shows the results of the measured allocations in tabular form User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 55 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays Allocation Summary Selection Antenna 1 Rel Power per Modulati Power dB KE EE RE dBm 0 000 45 546 ES 0 000 0 000 0 001 The rows in the table represent the allocations with allocation ALL being a special allo cation that summarizes all allocations that are part of the subframe A set of allocations form a subframe The subframes are separated by a dashed line The columns of the table contain the following information e Subframe Shows the subframe number e Allocation ID Shows the type ID of the allocation e Number of RB Shows the number of resource b
225. page 197 Low Pass Turns an anti aliasing low pass filter on and off The filter has a cut off frequency of 36 MHz and prevents frequencies above from being mixed into the usable frequency range Note that if you turn the filter off harmon ics or spurious emissions of the DUT might be in the frequency range above 36 MHz and might be missed You can turn it off for measurement bandwidths greater than 30 MHz The low pass filter is available for a baseband input source Remote command SENSe IQ LPASs STATe on page 197 Dither Adds a noise signal into the signal path of the baseband input Dithering improves the linearity of the A D converter at low signal levels or low modula tion Improving the linearity also improves the accuracy of the displayed signal levels The signal has a bandwidth of 2 MHz with a center frequency of 38 93 MHz Dithering is available for a baseband input source Remote command SENSe IQ DITHer STATe on page 197 Using Advanced Input Settings The advanced input settings contain settings that configure the RF input The advanced input settings are part of the Advanced tab of the General Settings dialog box General Analyzer Config MIMO Setup Trigger Spectrum Advanced Input Settings Advanced Auto Level Track Time 100 ms For more information see Defining a Reference Level on page 71 Configuring the Digital UO Input The digital UO settings contain settings that
226. parameter is available only if you have selected SEM Category Home Remote command SENSe POWer SEM CHBS AMPower on page 198 TX Power Turns automatic detection of the TX channel power for Medium Range base stations on and off When you turn this feature off you can manually define the power of the transmission channel When you turn automatic detection of the power on the software measures the power of the transmission channel The parameter is available only if you have selected SEM Category Medium Range Remote command State SENSe POWer SEM CHBS AMPower AUTO on page 194 Power SENSe POWer SEM CHBS AMPower on page 198 Assumed Adjacent Channel Carrier Selects the assumed adjacent channel carrier for the ACLR measurement Advanced Settings The supported types are EUTRA of same bandwidth 1 28 Mcps UTRA 3 84 Mcps UTRA and 7 68 Mcps UTRA Note that not all combinations of LTE Channel Bandwidth settings and Assumed Adj Channel Carrier settings are defined in the 3GPP standard Remote command SENSe POWer ACHannel AACHannel on page 195 Noise Correction Turns noise correction on and off Note that the input attenuator makes a clicking noise after each sweep if you are using the noise correction in combination with the auto leveling process Remote command SENSe POWer NCORrection on page 195 Auto Gating Turns gating for SEM and ACLR measurements on and off
227. performance of the MIMO transmitter hardware in a true MIMO measurement setup 8 4 1 MIMO Measurements with Signal Analyzers MIMO measurements require multiple signal analyzers The number depends on the number of data streams you have to capture For valid measurement results the frequencies of the analyzers in the test setup have to be synchronized It is also necessary to configure the trigger system properly to cap ture the data simultaneously Synchronizing the frequency The frequency of the analyzers in the test setup have to be synchronized Thus one of the analyzers master controls the other analyzers slaves in the test setup The mas ter analyzer has to be equipped with the LTE MIMO application and provides the refer ence oscillator source for the slave analyzers gt Connect the REF OUT of the master to the REF IN connector of the slaves Make sure to configure the slaves to use an external reference gt General Setup menu If you are using a measurement setup with several R amp S signal generators for example R amp S SMW the situation is similar One of the generators controls the other via the external reference gt Connect the REF OUT of the master to the REF IN of the slaves Make sure to configure the slaves to use an external reference gt Reference Oscillator settings Triggering MIMO measurements For valid MIMO measurements it is crucial to capture all data streams simultaneously To do so you
228. ple if the cabling on one antenna is faulty For more information on configuring this measurement see chapter 4 1 6 Configuring Time Alignment Measurements on page 76 Time Alignment Error Reference Antenna Antenna 1 CC1 Frequency Error to CC1 Time Aligment Error to Antenna 1 CC1 Mean 0 00 ns User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 39 Measuring the Error Vector Magnitude EVM You can select the reference antenna via Antenna Selection in the MIMO Configura tion When you perform a time alignment measurement the software also displays the Power Spectrum result display Remote command Selecting the result display CALCulate lt screenid gt FEED PVT TAER Querying results FETCh TAERror CC lt cci gt ANTenna lt antenna gt AVERage on page 158 Selecting reference antenna CONFigure LTE DL CC cci MIMO ASELection on page 208 Querying the frequency error FETCh CC cci SUMMary RFERror AVERage on page 156 3 3 Measuring the Error Vector Magnitude EVM This chapter contains information on all measurements that show the error vector mag nitude EVM of a signal The EVM is one of the most important indicators for the quality of a signal For more information on EVM calculation methods refer to chapter 8 Measurement Basics on page 126 uU BIS Me as 40 EVM BE
229. puter name Mozos Gm Bios version DHCP RTO BIOS Il Lo Network 7 Image version IP Address 2 4 Application Overview Starting the application To start the software use either the shortcut on the computer desktop or the entry in the Microsoft Windows Start menu If you run the software on an analyzer access the software via the Mode menu P Press the MODE key and select EUTRA LTE R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Welcome OEE Presetting the software When you first start the software all settings are in their default state After you have changed any parameter you can restore the default state with the PRESET key Note that using the preset function also presets an analyzer if one is connected and you capture the data from the hardware CONFigure PRESet on page 226 Using the preset if the software has been installed on an R amp S FSQ R amp S FSG R amp S FSV R amp S FSVR or R amp S FSW presets the software and the analyzer and exits the LTE software SCPI command RST Elements and layout of the user interface The user interface of the LTE measurement application is made up of several ele ments Capture Tim Power vs Symbol X Carrier User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 26 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Welcome 1 Header table The header table shows basic information like measurement frequency or sync state 2 Diagram area The diagram area contains the measurement results You c
230. r rier n lt I SFO Sym n Carrier1 gt lt Q SFO Sym n Carrier1 gt lt I SFO Sym n Carrier n gt Q SFO Sym n Carrier n gt lt I SF1 Sym0 Carrier1 gt Q SF 1 SymO Carrier1 lt I SF1 Sym0 Carrier n gt Q SF 1 SymO Car rier n I SF1 Sym1 Carrier1 Q SF 1 Sym1 Carrier1 lt I SF1 Sym1 Carrier n gt Q SF 1 Sym1 Car rier n I SF n Sym n Carrier1 Q SF n Sym n Carrier1 I SF n Sym n Carrier n lt Q SF n Sym n Carrier n gt With SF subframe and Sym symbol of that subframe The I and Q values have no unit The number of return values depends on the constellation selection By default it returns all resource elements including the DC carrier The following parameters are supported e TRACE1 Returns all constellation points included in the selection 9 6 1 14 CSI RS Weights Magnitude For the CSI RS Weights Magnitude result display the command returns one value for each subcarrier that has been analyzed Magnitude The unit dB The following parameters are supported e TRACE1 Returns the magnitude of the measured weights of the reference signal RS carri ers over one subframe 9 6 1 15 9 6 1 16 9 6 1 17 Remote Commands to Read Trace Data CSI RS Weights Phase For the CSI RS Weights Phase result display the command returns one value for each subcarrier that has been analyzed
231. r he enu kk Rec thx inen chain 156 FETCh CC cci SUMMary RFERror AVERage sess 156 FETCRSUMMary RSSEMAXIMUM se ccs reader ceca trea rectae petet ga co ro ted tree veste 157 FETCh SUMMary RSSEMINImUEY 2 aceti aepo tease raa pec tama EERSTEN EN 157 FETGCh SUMMaryiRSSIDAVERage EE 157 FETOh SUMMany RS TPMAXIMUM ausge cacao ag ere tere obe exstet apnea ctt reum 157 FETCh SUMMary RSTP MINimUm 9 rai iiia tocco cuu coh cris eder ea eroe eed apte doas co uua 157 a le ee ET Ee nd EE EE 157 FE TCh SUMMarv SGERRor MAXIMUM Zaa eee ee ee ee eee eteceteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeesaeaeaaaaae 157 FETCH SUMMancSE RRO MINIMU cniri See oe 157 FEIChSUMMary SERRorEAVERage 2 ascen thao AER NEEN 157 FETCSUMMary IF RIME EE 157 FETChTAEbRrortGGscclslANTenna antennaz MANilmum nr rnrnnnrrrneene 158 FETChTAEbRrortGGscclslANTenna antennaz MlNimum ennnen 158 FETChTAEbRrortGGsceclslANTenna antennazJAVtERaoel sse 158 FETCh SUMMary CRESt MAXimum FETCh SUMMary CRESt MINimum FETCh SUMMary CRESt AVERage This command queries the average crest factor as shown in the result summary Return values lt CrestFactor gt lt numeric value gt Crest Factor in dB Example FETC SUMM CRES Returns the current crest factor in dB Usage Query only FETCh SUMMary EVM ALL MAXimum FETCh SUMMary EVM ALL MINimum FETCh SUMMary EVM ALL AVERage This co
232. r selection The y axis shows the amplitude of each reference signal in dB The results correspond to the data of one subframe Thus the result display shows results if you have selected a particular subframe gt Subframe Selection IESSE User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 62 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays UE specific RS Weights Selection Gutt 2 Magnitude Difference Max 400 300 0 200 300 400 Carrier Number Remote command Selecting the result display Querying results Beamform Allocation Summary Starts the Beamform Allocation Summary result display The result display shows the phase characteristics for each PDSCH and if available EPDCCH allocation used by the UE specific reference signals in numerical form UE specific RS Weights vs Selection Subfr 0AP 5 7 Allocation CH1 Tx1 CH2 Tx 2 Sub Allocation 1 Sub Allocation Phase Phase frame i frame ID Diff 0 PD 0 124 007 2 079 The rows in the table represent the allocations A set of allocations form a subframe The subframes are separated by a dashed line The columns of the table contain the follwing information e Subframe Shows the subframe number e Allocation ID Shows the type ID of the allocation e Phase Shows the phase of the allocation e Phase Diff erence User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 63 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays eS SS SS EE EE EEE SS EE EE SS Se Se Show
233. re quency Networks MBSFNs You can find the MBSFN characteristics in the Demod Settings dialog box QConfiguring WE a E 116 e Configuring MBSFN Subframes cccscccessccccessesscceeeeeescecsesseeseecenssecceteeeesees 117 Configuring MBSFNs The general MBSFN settings contain settings that apply to all subframes that contain MBSEFN information The MBSFN settings are part of the MBSFN Settings tab of the Demodulation Set tings dialog box Downlink Demodulation Settings Downlink Signal Characteristics Downlink Advanced Signal Characteristics MBSFN Settings MBSFN Settings Present Iw Rel Power 0 000 dB Area ID DU Non MBSFN Region Length 2 D Defining MBSFN Characteristics POSEE ond EES 117 AP 117 MBSFN Relative Power 117 Non MBSEN Region e E 117 Present Includes or excludes an MBSFN from the test setup Remote command CONFigure LTE DL MBSFn STATe on page 224 Area ID Defines the ID for an MBFSN area Radio cells that shall transmit the same content to multiple users will form a so called MBSFN area Multiple cells can belong to such an area and every cell can be part of up to eight MBSFN areas There could be up to 256 different MBSFN areas defined each one with an own identity The area ID N 5M8FSN is defined in 3GPP 36 211 Remote command CONFigure LTE DL MBSFn AI ID On page 224 MBSFN Relative Power Defines the power of the MBSFN transmission relative
234. re LTE DL PBCH POWer on page 221 Configuring the PCFICH The physical control format indicator channel PCFICH carries information about the format of the PDCCH You can include or exclude the PCFICH in the test setup and define the relative power of this channel je lee NEE 112 PCRIGH RelalivB EE 112 5 3 6 3 Defining Advanced Signal Characteristics PCFICH Present Includes or excludes the PCFICH from the test setup Remote command CONFigure LTE DL PCFich STAT on page 220 PCFICH Relative Power Defines the power of the PCFICH relative to the reference signal Remote command CONFigure LTE DL PCFich POWer on page 222 Configuring the PHICH The physical hybrid ARQ indicator channel PHICH contains the hybrid ARQ indicator The hybrid ARQ indicator contains the acknowledgement negative acknowledgments for uplink blocks You can set several specific parameters for the PHICH Turning off the PHICH If you set the value of the PHICH N to Custom and at the same time define 0 PHICH groups the PHICH is excluded from the signal PHIGH DUFSUOF perceive dec erect ec eno ihn ederent ia voe ri reete ia t et eda re 112 PHICH TDD 191 E TM cce Rte SR de DR Rene nec ree 112 aal a E E A NAT 113 PRIGEHINUmber of GTOUDS meistrai a Rs nee eter erbe e rs s 113 PHICH NEEN EE 113 PHICH Duration Selects the duration of the PHICH Normal and extended duration are supported With a norma
235. rement Setups ccccccceeecceceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseueeeeenaaeeeaes 190 9 7 3 USING EN Lee E 192 9 7 4 Configuring Spectrum Measurements sss eene 194 9 7 5 Remote Commands for Advanced Settings sss 196 9 8 Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation esssss 199 9 8 1 Remote Commands for PDSCH Demodulation Geitings eneee 199 9 8 2 Remote Commands for DL Signal Characherlstlce ereet rererere rererere 204 9 8 8 Remote Commands for DL Advanced Signal Characheristce eee 213 9 8 4 Remote Commands for MBSFN Gettings 223 9 9 Configuring the Software eseeeesieeisseeseeeee sees nennen nn etna nnn nn nani nnns annuus 225 9 10 Managing Files ecrit etiem en etiain etia aint nuin naa SANNA au uae Ru Runs 226 Ce M 229 e 234 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Introduction 1 1 1 Introduction Currently UMTS networks worldwide are being upgraded to high speed downlink packet access HSDPA in order to increase data rate and capacity for downlink packet data In the next step high speed uplink packet access HSUPA will boost uplink per formance in UMTS networks While HSDPA was introduced as a 3GPP Release 5 fea ture HSUPA is an important feature of 3GPP Release 6 The combination of HSDPA and HSUPA is often referred to as HSPA However even with the
236. rical balanced or asymmetrical unbalanced Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example INP IQ BAL ON Specifies symmetrical balanced IQ inputs SENSe IQ LPASs STATe State This command turns a baseband input lowpass filter on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example IQ LPAS ON Activate the input lowpass SENSe IQ DITHer STATe State This command adds or removes a noise signal into the signal path dithering Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF Example IQ DITH ON Activate input dithering Using Advanced Input Settings SENSE POWerAUTO lt instrunme an UE 197 SENSe POWer AUTO lt instrument gt TIME lt Time gt This command defines the track time for the auto level process Remote Commands to Configure General Settings Parameters lt Time gt lt numeric value gt RST 100 ms Default unit s Example POW AUTO TIME 200ms An auto level track time of 200 ms gets set 9 7 5 4 Configuring the Digital UO Input The digital UO input is available with option R amp S FSQ B17 or R amp S FSV B17 INPUtsn DIG RANGE FUP PGR EE 198 MIN PUSS elle e KEE 198 INPut lt n gt DIQ RANGe UPPer lt ScaleLevel gt This command defines the full scale level for a digital UO signal source Parameters lt ScaleLevel gt RST 1V Default unit V Example INP DIQ RANG 0 7 Sets the full scale level to 0 7 V
237. rror occurs when the number of resource blocks in the subframe exceeds the bandwidth you have set Number of Allocations 6 Subframe Bandwidth 3 MHz or 15 Resource Blocks e Collision with allocation An RB overlap error occurs if one or more allocations overlap In that case check if the length and offset values of the allocations are correct Number of Allocations 6 Subframe Bandwidth 3 MHz or 15 Resource Blocks 5 2 4 Enhanced Settings The Enhanced Settings contain mostly functionality to configure the precoding scheme of a physical channel The software supports several precoding schemes that you can select from a dropdown menu In addition you can configure PDSCH allocations that use carrier aggregation Precoding Beamforming UE spec RS e Defining Downlink Signal Characteristics EE 103 Tans mtDNA T T 103 Spatial MUMPIEXING EE 103 Beamforming UE Spec RS eerie ae Ze kee ie EE E AARE 104 Gamar AGIS IONE T 105 None Turns off precoding Remote command CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt PRECoding SCHeme on page 212 Transmit Diversity Turns on precoding for transmit diversity according to 3GPP TS 36 211 Remote command CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt PRECoding SCHeme on page 212 Spatial Multiplexing Turns on precoding for spatial multiplexing according to 3GPP TS 36 211 If you are using spatial multip
238. rs The mapping of antenna port to the physical antenna is fix e Port 15 antenna 1 e Port 16 antenna 2 Port 17 antenna 3 e Port 18 antenna 4 Resource elements used by CSI RS are shown in yellow color in the Allocation ID ver sus Symbol X Carrier measurement The CSI RS settings are part of the Downlink Advanced Signal Characteristics tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box Downlink Demodulation Settings Downlink Signal Characteristics Downlink Advanced Signal Characteristics M CSI Reference Signal Present Iv Configuration Index D Rel Power 0 000 dB Antenna Ports 1 Antenna Port D Subframe Configuration D Frame Number Offset 0 Overwrite POSCH r PIBSBIE i iue EE RO tuse nin desea aridi iuncti Pac eee 109 ul Rn E 109 RE eieiei Elte 109 Subframe Configuratio iust rere aee e e ed inda 109 Defining Advanced Signal Characteristics Relative Power CSI Reference Gional 109 Frame Number Offset teet e aic e dE nd eg tei rae t d en 109 p mia POSCH BEE 110 Present Turns the CSI reference signal on and off Remote command CONFigure LTE DL CSIRs STATe on page 218 Antenna Ports Defines the number of antenna ports that transmit the CSI reference signal The CSI reference signals are transmitted on one two four or eight antenna ports using e p 15 e p 15to 16 e p 15to 18 e p 15to 22 Remote command CONFigure LTE DL CSIRs NAP on page 217 Configuration Index Defines th
239. rz License Information dialog box MAC Chip ID 204AD50F2D 44 Option Option Type Licenses Validity P Used keycode FS K130PC 2011 09 22 08 28 Permanent 1 permanent 081136917622005249260395431512 FS K96PC 2011 09 22 08 28 Permanent 1 permanent 395057444509254062060722725161 4 Connect the smartcard dongle to the computer 2 2 2 3 2 3 1 Installing the Software 5 Press the Check Licenses button The software shows all current licenses The serial number which is necessary to know if you need a license is shown in the Serial column The Device ID also contains the serial number 6 To enter a new license code press the Enter License Key Code button Installing the Software For information on the installation procedure see the release notes of the software Connecting the Computer to an Analyzer In order to be able to communicate with an analyzer R amp S FSQ R amp S FSG R amp S FSV R amp S FSVR or R amp S FSW or oscilloscope R amp S RTO family you have to connect it to a computer You can use the IEEE bus GPIB or a local area network LAN Requirements To be able to capture I Q data you need one of the signal analyzers or oscilloscopes mentioned above If you are using an R amp S FSQ you must e use firmware 3 65 or higher to be able to establish a connection via TCP IP or e install the RSIB passport driver on the computer The driver is availa
240. s State ON The CSI reference signal overwrite PDSCH resource elements OFF PDSCH resource elements remain Example CONF DL CSIR OPDS ON Overwrites PDSCH resource elements if necessary CONFigure L TE DL CSIRs POWer Power This command defines the relative power of the CSI reference signal Parameters Power Default unit dB Example CONF DL CSIR POW 1 Defines a relative power of 1 dB for the CSI reference signal CONFigure L TE DL CSIRs SCI Configuration This command defines the subframe configuration for the CSI reference signal 9 8 3 5 Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation Parameters lt Configuration gt Number that selects the subframe configuration Range 0 to 154 Example CONF DL CSIR SCI 4 Selects subframe configuration 4 for the CSI reference signal CONFigure LTE DL CSIRs STATe lt State gt This command turns the CSI reference signal on and off Parameters lt State gt ON OFF Example CONF DL CSIR STAT ON Turns the CSI reference signal on Configuring the Control Channel CONFig re LTE DL EPDC h LOCalized sse nennen 218 GONFiIgurer E TELDE EPDOCMNPRB ed iiti ore ioo edd 219 EE Lee Die LTELDLEP DCN POW EE 219 CONFigure L TE DL EPDCch RBASsign eise ener hne nnne 219 CON Lee CR LTE DL Ree EE 219 GONFigure E TEP DLUIPBCHISTA LT missni rreri sarau a eiaa e iaaea tia Ennai ai 219 EE Le DEE LTELDEPOFCN STA E 220 CONFiguire LTE DL PH
241. s Bandwidth BW1 40 BW3_00 BW5_00 BW10_00 BW15_00 BW20 00 RST BW10 00 Example Single carrier measurement CONF DL BW BW1 40 Defines a channel bandwidth of 1 4 MHz Example Aggregated carrier measurement CONF NOCC 2 CONF DL CC1 BW BW10 00 CONF DL CC2 BW BW5 00 Selects two carriers one with a bandwidth of 5 MHz the other with 10 MHz CONFigure L TE DL CC cci CYCPrefix lt PrefixLength gt This command selects the cyclic prefix Parameters lt PrefixLength gt Example Example Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation NORM Normal cyclic prefix length EXT Extended cyclic prefix length AUTO Automatic cyclic prefix length detection RST AUTO Single carrier measurements CONF DL CYCP EXT Selects an extended cyclic prefix Aggregated carrier measurements CONF DL CC1 CYCP EXT Selects an extended cyclic prefix for the first carrier CONFigure L TE DL CC cci TDD UDConf Configuration This command selects the subframe configuration for TDD signals Parameters Configuration Example Example Range 0 to 6 RST 0 Single carrier measurements CONF DL TDD UDC 4 Selects allocation configuration number 4 Carrier aggregation measurements CONF DL CC1 TDD UDC 4 Selects allocation configuration number 4 for the first carrier CONFigure LTE DL CC lt cci gt TDD SPSC lt Configuration gt This command selects the speci
242. s and symbols of a specific subframe The x axis represents the subframes with the number of displayed subframes being 10 SSE SS ae User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 43 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays On the y axis the EVM is plotted either in or in dB depending on the E EVM vs Subframe Maximum 1 333 0Subframe Selection Antenna 1 Subframe Number Remote command Selecting the result display Querying results Frequency Error vs Symbol Starts the Frequency Error vs Symbol result display This result display shows the Frequency Error on symbol level You can use it as a debugging technique to identify any frequency errors within symbols The result is an average over all subcarriers The x axis represents the OFDM symbols The number of displayed symbols depends on the Subframe Selection and the length of the cyclic prefix On the y axis the fre quency error is plotted in Hz Note that the variance of the measurement results in this result display may be much higher compared to the frequency error display in the Result Summary depending on the PDSCH and control channel configuration The potential difference is caused by the number of available resource elements for the measurement on symbol level Frequency Error vs Symbol Maximum 19 8 Symbol Minimum 14 Symbol N CH d Frequency Error H 100 120 Symbol Number Remote command Selecting the result display CALC Qu
243. s frequency scale for the x axis SENSe L TE ANTenna SELect Antenna This command selects the antenna for which the results are shown Available if the number of input channels is From Antenna Selection Remote Commands to Configure General Settings Parameters lt Antenna gt Number of the antenna 11213 4 Number of the antenna ALL Shows the results for all antennas RST 1 Example SENS ANT SEL 2 Selects antenna 2 s e mn SENSe L TE SOURce SELect Source This command selects the antenna ports the results are displayed for Parameters Source ALL Shows the results for all UO data streams in the result display numeric value Selects one UO data stream to display the results for The range depends on the number of input channels you are using Example SOUR SEL 4 Shows the results for the 4th UO data stream SENSe LTE SUBFrame SELect lt Subframe gt This command selects the subframe to be analyzed Parameters lt Subframe gt ALL lt numeric value gt ALL Select all subframes 0 39 Select a single subframe RST ALL Example SUBF SEL ALL Select all subframes for analysis 9 7 1 6 Configuring Time Alignment Measurements Remote commands to configure Time Alignment measurements described elsewhere SENSe FREQuency CENTer CC lt cci gt on page 182 Demod settings for CC2 chapter 9 8 Remote Command to Co
244. s the phase difference of the allocation relative to the first antenna Remote command Selecting the result display CALCulate lt screenid gt FEED BEAM URWA Querying results TRACe DATA Cell RS Weights Phase Starts the Cell RS Weights Phase result display This result display shows the phase of the measured weights of the reference signal RS carriers specific to the cell This measurement enables phase measurements on antenna port 0 using for example the enhanced test models like E TM 1 1 You can use the result display to calculate the phase difference between different antenna ports The x axis represents the frequency with the unit depending on your selection The y axis shows the phase of each reference signal in degree The results correspond to the data of one subframe Thus the result display shows results if you have selected a particular subframe gt Subframe Selection Cell specific RS Weights Selection CH1 Phase 300 Max 111 Hin 100 0 100 Carrier Number Remote command Selecting the result display CALCulate lt screenid gt FEED BEAM CRWP Querying results chapter 9 6 1 8 Cell RS Weights Phase Difference on page 162 Cell RS Weights Difference Phase Starts the Cell RS Weights Phase result display This result display shows the phase difference of the measured weights of the refer ence signal RS carriers specific to the cell This measurement enables phase meas urements on ant
245. s the relative power to 1 1 dB CONFigure LTE DL PCFich POWer lt Power gt This command defines the relative power of the PCFICH Parameters lt Power gt lt numeric value gt RST 0 dB Default unit DB Example CONF DL PCF POW 0 Sets the relative power to 0 dB CONFigure LTE DL PHICh POWer Power This command defines the relative power of the PHICH Parameters Power numeric value RST 3 01 dB Default unit DB Example CONF DL PHIC POW 1 3 Sets the relative power to 1 3 dB CONFigure LTE DL PDCCh POWer Power This command defines the relative power of the PDCCH Parameters Power numeric value RST 0 dB Default unit DB Example CONF DL PDCCH POW 1 2 Sets the relative power to 1 2 dB 9 8 3 6 Defining the PDSCH Resource Block Symbol Offset CONFigure L TEL DL P OFtset nennen ener rerit h nnn nnns 222 CONFigure L TE DL PSOFfset Offset This command defines the symbol offset for PDSCH allocations relative to the start of the subframe The offset applies to all subframes Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation Parameters lt Offset gt AUTO Automatically determines the symbol offset lt numeric value gt Manual selection of the symbol offset Range 0 to 4 RST AUTO Example CONF DL PSOF 2 Sets an offset of 2 symbols 9 8 3 7 Configuring Shared Channels GONFiguire L TEDL P
246. schemes and protocols were studied Notably LTE uses new multiple access schemes on the air interface orthogonal frequency division multiple access OFDMA in downlink and single carrier frequency division multiple access SC FDMA in uplink Furthermore MIMO antenna schemes form an essential part of LTE In an attempt to simplify protocol architecture LTE brings some major changes to the exist ing UMTS protocol concepts Impact on the overall network architecture including the core network is being investigated in the context of 3GPP system architecture evolu tion SAE e Requirements for UMTS Long Term Evolutton 7 e Long Term Evolution Downlink Transmission Scheme eese 9 REICIONCOS RON LOT IET 14 Requirements for UMTS Long Term Evolution LTE is focusing on optimum support of packet switched PS services Main require ments for the design of an LTE system are documented in 3GPP TR 25 913 1 and can be summarized as follows User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 7 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Introduction e Data Rate Peak data rates target 100 Mbps downlink and 50 Mbps uplink for 20 MHz spectrum allocation assuming two receive antennas and one transmit antenna are at the terminal e Throughput The target for downlink average user throughput per MHz is three to four times better than Release 6 The target for uplink average user throughput per MHz is two to three times better than Release 6 e Sp
247. se errors resulting from the measurement equipment Required equipment Calibrating beamforming phase measurements requires the following equipment e An R amp S RTO with four channels Note All data streams have to be measured on a single oscilloscope Signal ana lyzers and oscilloscopes with less than four channels are not supported for the cali bration Calibration is only valid for a particular test setup If you replace measurement equipment calibration becomes invalid and you have to recalibrate the test setup e An Rohde amp Schwarz signal generator R amp S SMBV or similar equipped with the LTE option e An RF splitter 4 way or 2 way User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 136 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurement Basics e Optional an attenuator between cable and oscilloscope to improve the matching impedance Improving the matching impedance improves the accuracy of the results even more Preparing the calibration measurement The software creates the calibration data from an LTE signal that you can generate with an Rohde amp Schwarz signal generator To get the signal preset the signal generator and select the appropriate channel band width for the beamforming phase measurement All other settings should remain the same However make sure that the signal contains the antenna port 0 of the reference signal When done configure the LTE measurement software with the settings required for the beamforming measurement
248. splays eS EE SS SS EEE EE EE EEE SS EE EE EEE SS Sl UE RS Weights Difference Phase Starts the UE RS Weights Difference Phase result display This result display shows the phase difference of the measured weights of the UE spe cific reference signals between multiple antenna ports The reference antenna for this measurement is always antenna one The x axis represents the frequency with the unit depending on your selection The y axis shows the phase difference of each reference signal in degree The results correspond to the data of one subframe Thus the result display shows results if you have selected a particular subframe gt Subframe Selection You can select the antenna port to be measured via the Beamforming Selection soft key Note that you can select the antenna port only if the UE RS weights phase mea surement is selected UE specific RS Weights Selection Sub r 2 Phase Difference Max Min 100 0 100 Carrier Number Remote command Selecting the result display CALCulate lt screenid gt FEED BEAM URPD Querying results TRACe DATA UE RS Weights Difference Magnitude Starts the UE RS Weights Difference Magnitude result display This result display shows the amplitude difference of the measured weights of the UE specific reference signals between multiple antenna ports The reference antenna for this measurement is always antenna one The x axis represents the frequency with the unit depending on you
249. sult summary Return values lt RSTP gt RSTP in dBm Example FETC SUMM RSTP Queries the RSTP Usage Query only FETCh SUMMary SERRor MAXimum FETCh SUMMary SERRor MINimum FETCh SUMMary SERRor AVERage This command queries the sampling error Return values lt SamplingError gt lt numeric value gt Minimum maximum or average sampling error depending on the last command syntax element Default unit ppm Example FETC SUMM SERR Returns the current mean sampling error in ppm Usage Query only FETCh SUMMary TFRame This command queries the sub frame start offset as shown in the Capture Buffer result display 9 6 9 6 1 Remote Commands to Read Trace Data Return values lt Offset gt Time difference between the sub frame start and capture buffer start Default unit s Example FETC SUMM TFR Returns the sub frame start offset Usage Query only FETCh TAERror CC lt cci gt ANTenna lt antenna gt MAXimum FETCh TAERror CC lt cci gt ANTenna lt antenna gt MINimum FETCh TAERror CC lt cci gt ANTenna lt antenna gt AVERage This command queries the time alignment error Return values lt Time Alignment Minimum maximum or average time alignment error depending Error gt on the last command syntax element Default unit s Example FETC TAER ANT2 Returns the average time alignment error between the reference antenna and antenna 2 in s Usage
250. sure ments a maximum of two screens is possible By default the software shows the results in all four screens The screens are labeled A to D to the right of the measurement diagrams The label of the currently active screen is highlighted green Bl The currently active screen is the one settings are applied to Configuring the Software Switch between the screens with the Screen A Screen B Screen C and Screen D hotkeys The background color of the software by default is black Apply another color via the Color Selection softkey and the corresponding dialog box For documentation purposes the software provides a hardcopy function that lets you save the current results in one of the following formats e bmp e gif e jpeg e png e tiff Use the Hardcopy to Clipboard function to take a screenshot DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SELect on page 226 2 5 2 Configuring the Software The Setup menu contains various general software functions P Press the SETUP key to access the Setup menu Configure Analyzer Connection Opens the General Settings dialog box For more information see MIMO Analyzer Configuration on page 81 Data Source Instr File Selects the general input source an instrument or a file For more information see Selecting the Input Source on page 70 Dongle License Info Opens the Rohde amp Schwarz License Information dialog box The dialog box contains functionality to add
251. symbols with each symbol represented by a dot on the line The number of displayed symbols depends on the Subframe Selection and the length of the cyclic prefix Any missing connections from one dot to another mean that the software could not determine the EVM for that symbol In case of TDD signals the result display does not show OFDM symbols that are not part of the measured link direction On the y axis the EVM is plotted either in or in dB depending on the EVM vs Symbol Maximum 2 571 0 Symbol Selection Antenna 1 Minimum l 34 Symbol Zi LO A fal d Ware C r3 d A A ei ed S 4 Vi Li pre SY 7 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 Symbol Number Remote command Selecting the result display C Querying results EVM vs Sym x Carr The EVM vs Symbol x Carrier shows the EVM for each carrier in each symbol The horizontal axis represents the symbols The vertical axis represents the carriers Different colors in the diagram area represent the EVM The color map for the power levels is provided above the diagram area EVM vs Symbol X Carrier Selection Antenna 1 0 0 300 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 Symbol Number Remote command Selecting the result display C Querying results User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 42 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays eS EEE EEE SS EE EE ES ES Ee SS Se EVM vs RB Starts the EVM vs RB result display This result display shows the Error Vector Ma
252. t k SUMMary QUADerror AVERage RESUIt ees 180 CAL Culate nzLlMitcks SGUMMarv SERorMAXimum RESuI nenene rer ererererene 181 CALOCulate n LIMit k SUMMary SERRor AVERage RESUIt eeeeeesesssssss 181 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMary EVM ALL MAXimum RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMary EVM ALL AVERage RESult This command queries the results of the EVM limit check of all resource elements Return values lt LimitCheck gt The type of limit average or maximum that is queried depends on the last syntax element FAILED Limit check has failed PASSED Limit check has passed NOTEVALUATED Limits have not been evaluated Example CALC LIM SUMM EVM RES Queries the limit check Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMary EVM DSQP MAXimum RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMary EVM DSQP AVERage RESult This command queries the results of the EVM limit check of all PDSCH resource ele ments with a QPSK modulation Return values lt LimitCheck gt The type of limit average or maximum that is queried depends on the last syntax element FAILED Limit check has failed PASSED Limit check has passed NOTEVALUATED Limits have not been evaluated Example CALC LIM SUMM EVM DSQP RES Queries the limit check Remote Commands to Read Trace Data Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMary EV
253. t segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length 9 3 Remote Commands to Select a Result Display GALC Ulate lt n gt TR E 147 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TABLE 0ceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeseae eae aeaaaaaaaeaaaaaeeseeeeesereeeeeeeeeees 148 CALCulate lt n gt FEED lt DispType gt This command selects the measurement and result display Parameters lt DispType gt String containing the short form of the result display See table below for details Example CALC2 FEED PVT CBUF Select Capture Buffer to be displayed on screen B Result display Parameter ACLR SPEC ACP Allocation ID vs Symbol x Carrier STAT AISC Allocation Summary STAT ASUM Beamform Allocation Summary BEAM URWA Bitstream STAT BSTR Capture Buffer PVT CBUF CCDF STAT CCDF Cell RS Weights Phase BEAM CRWP Cell RS Weights Difference Phase BEAM CRPD Channel Decoder STAT CDR Constellation Diagram CONS CONS CSI RS Weights Magnitude BEAM IRWM CSI RS Weights Phase BEAM IRWP EVM vs Carrier EVM EVCA EVM vs RB EVM EVRP EVM vs Subframe EVM EVSU EVM vs Symbol EVM EVSY EVM vs Symbol x Carrier EVM EVSC Flatness Difference SPEC FLAT Frequency Error vs Symbol EVM FEVS 9 4 Remote Commands to Perform Measurements Result display Parameter Group Delay SPEC GDEL On Off Power
254. te rrt rne trn pepe e e ED a EHE eu 157 FETCh SUMMary RSTPEAVERAge rre titt ett poU i eben EL a ii T re Eee eH SE eA BERE EE See 157 FETCh SUMMary SERROMMAXIMUIN ses cisccasis cece inr inei ra eia oria nasa re ra cer EE ane pe FI EXER XR EYE HERR RR RSS 157 FETCH SUMMary EbkerchMi NOUR enee Se det ee 157 FETCh SUMMary SERRor AVERage FET Ch SUMMany TRRAMG acne re n Et e s EE at Pb ee dl vedo E Ed reet ced 157 FETCh TAERror CC cci ANTenna antenna MAXimum esses nennen nenne 158 FETCh TAERror CC cci ANTenna antenna MlNimum essent 158 FE TOChTAEbRrotCCGscozsANTenna anmtennazTAVERaoel eee cece eeee cscs eeneeteeeeeneeseeeseeeteteseeees 158 FETChECC lt CciF K E dE 206 FETCh CC cci e EE 206 EETCh GCscci2 EPEG GIDGEOUD nter tct erc t E es ettet d pese deve b pd et e ea 207 NK UR RO e TIR VE 208 FETCh CC cci SUMMary RFERror AVERage ertet rr eee trn n rrr 156 FORMatiDATA INITiate REFResh INITiate IMMediate Sale EEN TR MR EE 197 INPUEIQ FSOPISCb M 196 INPUTIQEIMPEGANGCE C 196 INPut n AT Tenuationsinstrumbente ont erret ner rn rn eder i te re PX E npn 184 leien Elle E E EE 198 INPut lt n gt DIQ SRATe af MMEMory LOAD DEMOdS tting 22 ENER rep ne EEN d Re EE aeger E EENS 226 MMEM ry ee E KEE 227 MMEMory LOAD ST MOB KEE 22
255. ters lt Path gt String containing the path and name of the calibration file Example CAL PHAS GEN C calibration cal Generates calibration data and saves it to a file Usage Setting only CALibration PHASe LOAD lt Path gt This command restores a calibration file for beamforming measurements that you have previously created Setting parameters lt Path gt String containing the path and name of the calibration file Example CAL PHAS LOAD C calibration cal Restores the calibration data Usage Setting only INITiate IMMediate This command initiates a new measurement sequence With a frame count gt 0 this means a restart of the corresponding number of measure ments In single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the sweep is not possible Example INIT Initiates a new measurement Usage Event INITiate REFResh This command updates the current UO measurement results to reflect the current mea surement settings No new UO data is captured Thus measurement settings apply to the I Q data cur rently in the capture buffer The command applies exclusively to l Q measurements It requires UO data Example INIT REFR The application updates the IQ results Usage Event Remote Commands to Perform Measurements SENSe SYNC STATe This command queries the current synchronization state Return val
256. this method the software measures the boosting for each PDCCH it has detected The result is displayed in the Channel Decoder Results e Physical detection The physical detection is based on power and modulation detection Physical detection makes measurements on TDD E TMs without a 20 ms trigger signal possible For more information on automatic demodulation see Auto PDSCH Demodulation on page 89 Remote command SENSe LTE DL FORMat PSCD on page 200 Configuring Multicarrier Base Stations The multicarrier base station settings contain settings to configure measurements on multicarrier base stations The multicarrier base station settings are part of the Downlink Demodulation Settings tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box Downlink Demodulation Settings Downlink Signal Characteristics Downlink Advanced Signal Characteristics Multicarrier Base Station Multicarrier Filter mi lte ue dl EEN 90 Multicarrier Filter Turns the suppression of interference of neighboring carriers for tests on multiradio base stations on and off e g LTE WCDMA GSM etc Remote command SENSe LTE DL DEMod MCFilter on page 201 5 1 3 Configuring Downlink Signal Demodulation Configuring Parameter Estimation The parameter estimation settings contain settings that estimate various parameters during the measurement The parameter estimation settings are part of the Downlink Demodulation Settings tab of the
257. tion Settings Downlink Signal Characteristics Downlink Advanced Signal Characteristics Demodulated Data Scrambling of Coded Bits V Decode Al Channels 5s Scrambling of Coded D 93 Decode All GCrialiliels eer Regu a S KY RRRe S ERRRCHR S AYRERMER E 94 Scrambling of Coded Bits Turns the scrambling of coded bits for all physical channels like PDSCH or PHICH on and off The scrambling of coded bits affects the bitstream results Configuring Downlink Signal Demodulation Source ofbitstream results when Scrambling of coded bits is 0N 0FF unscrambled bits scrambled bits Scrambling Brems Scrambling onan Fig 5 1 Source for bitstream results if scrambling for coded bits is on and off codewords Remote command SENSe LTE DL DEMod CBSCrambling on page 203 Decode All Channels Turns the decoding of all physical channels on and off When you turn this feature on the software shows the decoding results in the Channel Decoder Results result display In addition the software only measures the EPDCCH resource block that are actually used When you turn the feature off e the PBCH is decoded only if the PHICH Duration or the PHICH N_g are automati cally determined e the PDCCH is decoded only if the PDSCH Subframe Configuration Detection is set to PDCCH protocol If decoding of all control channels is off measurement speed will increase Remote command SENSe
258. tional frequency offset compensated capture buffer and the timing esti mate soarse to position the window of the FFT If no P S Sync is available in the signal the reference signal is used for synchronization The fine timing block prior to the FFT allows a timing improvement and makes sure that the EVM window is centered on the measured cyclic prefix of the considered OFDM symbol For the 3GPP EVM calcula tion according to 3GPP TS 36 211 v8 9 0 the block window produces three signals taken at the timing offsets At 4 and at For the reference path only the signal taken at the timing offset A is used The LTE Downlink Analysis Measurement Application l Q data capture buffer Frequen cy Subcarrier compensation selection M ease Ela Frame Jum synchronisation Figearse Fine timi reference path H SES Coarse channel ET est RS based compensation SFO optional pme ason Phase sync SFO Phase sync RS and data pilots res CFO Customized compensation signals at time offsets AC AT and AT res CFO tracking Fig 8 1 Block diagram for the LTE DL measurement application After the time to frequency transformation by an FFT of length Nee the phase syn chronization block is used to estimate the following e the relative sampling frequency offset c SFO e the residual carrier frequency offset Af es CFO e the
259. tiplexing scheme TXD Use transmit diversity scheme RST NONE Example CONF DL SUBF2 ALL3 PREC SCH SPM Selects the spatial multiplexing precoding scheme for allocation 3 in subframe 2 CONFigure LTE DL 5SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt PRECoding SCID lt ID gt This command selects the scrambling identity nSCID The command is available for antenna ports 7 and 8 Parameters ID 0 1 Example CONF DL SUBF2 ALL4 PREC SCID 1 Selects scrambling identity 1 for allocation 4 in subframe 2 Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt PSOFfset lt PSOFfset gt This command defines the PDSCH start offset for a particular PDSCH allocation Parameters lt PSOFfset gt lt numeric value gt Number between 0 and 4 COMM Common PDSCH start offset Example CONF DL SUBF2 ALL2 PSOF 0 Defines a PDSCH start offset of 0 for the 2nd allocation in the 2nd subframe CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt RBCount lt ResourceBlocks gt This command selects the number of resource blocks of an allocation in a downlink subframe Parameters lt ResourceBlocks gt lt numeric value RST 6 Example CONF DL SUBF2 ALL5 RBC 25 Defines 25 resource block for allocation 5 in subframe 2 CONFigure LTE DL SUBFrame lt subframe gt ALLoc lt allocation gt RBOFfset lt Offset gt This
260. to the reference signal Remote command CONFigure LTE DL MBSFn POWer on page 224 Non MBSFN Region Length Selects the length of the MBSFN control data region at the start of the MBSFN sub frame If you select a region length of 1 the first symbol in an MBFSN subframe carries data of the control channel All other symbols of an MBSFN region may be used by the PMCH If you select a region length of 2 the first two symbols in an MBFSN subframe carry data of the control channel Remote command CONFigure LTE DL MBSFn AI NMRL on page 224 5 4 2 Configuring MBSFN Subframes If you are testing systems that support MBSFN 3GPP allows you to reserve one or more subframes for multimedia broadcasting The MBSFN subframe configuration is part of the MBSFN Settings tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box Defining MBSFN Characteristics Downlink Demodulation Settings Downlink Signal Characteristics Downlink Advanced Signal Characteristics MBSFN Settings MBSFN Subframe Configuration MBSFN Subframe PMCH Present Modulation MBSFN Subframe Shows the subframe number that may contain MBSFN data Note that 3GPP only allows to turn selected subframes into MBSFN subframes Depending on the configuration for example the TDD configuration different sub frame numbers are available for MBSFN transmissions Active Turns a subframe into a MBSFN subframe If active the correspon
261. ts of the Antenna Selection dropdown menu gt General Settings tab A description is pro vided below Antenna Port Selection Selecting the From Antenna Selection menu item has the following effects e The number of used input channels depends on the number of antennas gt MIMO Configuration and the Tx Antenna Selection e The contents of the Tx Antenna Selection dropdown menu change In addition to selecting a particular antenna you can let the software decide which antenna s to test and in which order gt Auto 1 Antenna etc In case of automatic detection the software analyzes the reference signal s to select the antenna s Displayed results for MIMO measurements In the default state each active result display shows the result for each input channel Thus the number of results corresponds to the Number of Input Channels you have selected For example if you have selected 4 input channels the software would show 4 Constellation Diagrams User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 79 Configuring MIMO Measurement Setups Because this screen layout may make it difficult to read individual results you have several options to increase the comfort of evaluating the results e Display one result display only gt Full screen mode e Open each result display in a separate window Open in Separate Window e Display the results for a particular stream of UO data only gt Antenna Selection gt General t
262. ts the frequency On the y axis the power is plotted in dB Channel Flatness Difference Maximum 0 040 dB 1 845 MHz Selection Antenna 1 Minimum 0 040 dB 1 845 MHz n A KEEN 1 1 Frequency MHz Remote command Selecting the result display C Querying results Channel Group Delay Starts the Channel Group Delay result display User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 51 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays This result display shows the group delay of each subcarrier The currently selected subframe depends on your selection The x axis represents the frequency On the y axis the group delay is plotted in ns Channel Group Delay Maximum 4 5000 000 Hz Selection Antenna 1 3 5 Minimum 1 0 1 Frequency MHz Remote command Selecting the result display CALCulate lt n gt FEED SPEC GDEL Querying results TRACe DATA Measuring the Symbol Constellation This chapter contains information on all measurements that show the constellation of a signal Constellation Diagram cninn ege 52 Evaluation Range for the Constellation Diaoram eee 53 Constellation Diagram Starts the Constellation Diagram result display This result display shows the inphase and quadrature phase results and is an indicator of the quality of the modulation of the signal In the default state the result display evaluates the full range of the measured input data You can filter the results in the Constellation Select
263. turns automatic demodulation for downlink signals on and off Parameters State ON OFF RST ON Example DL DEM AUTO ON Activates the auto demodulation for DL SENSe LTE DL FORMat PSCD Format This command selects the method of identifying the PDSCH resource allocation Parameters Format OFF Applies the user configuration of the PDSCH subframe regard less of the signal characteristics PDCCH Identifies the configuration according to the data in the PDCCH DCls PHYDET Manual PDSCH configuration analysis only if the actual sub frame configuration matches the configured one Automatic PDSCH configuration physical detection of the con figuration RST PHYD Example DL FORM PSCD OFF Applies the user configuration and does not check the received signal 9 8 1 2 Configuring Multicarrier Base Stations SENS LTE DEDEMod MCF EE 201 9 8 1 3 9 8 1 4 Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation SENSe LTE DL DEMod MCFilter lt State gt This command turns suppression of interfering neighboring carriers on and off e g LTE WCDMA GSM etc Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DL DEM MCF ON Turns suppression on of neighboring carriers on Configuring Parameter Estimation SENS LTE DL DEMO BES TIMAN iini i 2 2 2222222 eves ctii Caere edid eremi ene epu ci Dion nial 201 SENSe EETEEDE DEMed CES Timallorni 2 iren rene eese nr Rer tenni Lo ere
264. ues lt State gt The string contains the following information e lt OFDMSymbolTiming gt is the coarse symbol timing e lt P SYNCSynchronization gt is the P SYNC synchronization state e lt S SYNCSynchronization gt is the S SYNC synchronization state A zero represents a failure and a one represents a successful synchronization If no compatible frame has been found the command returns 0 0 0 Example SYNC STAT Would return e g 1 1 0 if coarse timing and P SYNC were suc cessful but S SYNC failed Usage Query only SENSe LTE 0OPower ATIMing This command adjusts the timing for On Off Power measurements Example OOP ATIM Adjusts the On Off Power timing Usage Event CONFigure LTE DL CONS LOCation lt Location gt This command selects the data source of the constellation diagram for measurements on downlink signals Parameters lt Location gt AMD After the MIMO decoder BMD Before the MIMO decoder RST BMD Example CONF DL CONS LOC AMD Use data from after the MIMO decoder CONFigure LTE DL BF AP lt Port gt This command selects the antenna port for beamforming measurements The availabilty of ports depends on the number of transmit antennas and number of beamforming layers Remote Commands to Read Numeric Results Parameters lt Port gt AP5715 antenna ports 5 7 15 AP816 antenna ports 8 16 AP917 antenna ports 9 17 AP1018 antenna ports 10 18 AP1119 antenna ports 11 19
265. umber you can select depends on the number of channels of the oscilloscope you are using Example CONF ACON NCH 2 Defines a measurement on 2 channels CONFigure LTE NSOurces lt Channels gt This command selects the number of input channels you are using to capture several streams of UO data 9 7 3 Remote Commands to Configure General Settings Parameters lt Channels gt 1121418 ASEL Number of channels is the same as the number of Tx antennas in the test setup CONFigure LTE DL CC cci MIMO CONFig Example CONF NSO 4 Selects four input channels Using a Trigger RE ee De 192 TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff instrumente 2 crece cedere ue kane ce oux h ae cu adag die 192 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel instrument EXTernal csse 193 TRIGger SEQuence LEVel lt instrument gt POWer esses 193 TRIGger SEQuence PORT instmiments 2 2 acria traccia cede aa e due a ag secu du keen 193 TRIGSen e ET ele 193 TRIGger SEQuence MODE Source This command selects the trigger source Parameters Source EXTernal Selects external trigger source IMMediate Selects free run trigger source POWer Selects IF power trigger source TUNit Selects the trigger unit R amp S FS Z11 as the trigger source RST IMMediate Example TRIG MODE EXT Selects an external trigger source TRIGger SEQuence HOLDoff lt instrument gt lt
266. vs Carrier Maximum 1 EI z Selection Antenna 1 Minimum m li M il ET iv H bag V kh Frequency 1 MHz a Remote command Selecting the result display CALCulate lt n gt FEED EVM EVCA Querying results TRACe DATA EVM vs Symbol Starts the EVM vs Symbol result display This result display shows the Error Vector Magnitude EVM of the OFDM symbols You can use it as a debugging technique to identify any symbols whose EVM is too high The results are based on an average EVM that is calculated over all subcarriers that are part of a particular OFDM symbol This average OFDM symbol EVM is determined for all OFDM symbols in each analyzed subframe If you analyze all subframes the result display contains three traces e Average EVM This trace shows the OFDM symbol EVM averaged over all subframes e Minimum EVM This trace shows the lowest average OFDM symbol EVM that has been found over the analyzed subframes e Maximum EVM This trace shows the highest average OFDM symbol EVM that has been found over the analyzed subframes If you select and analyze one subframe only the result display contains one trace that shows the OFDM symbol EVM for that subframe only Average minimum and maxi mum values in that case are the same For more information see Subframe Selection on page 75 User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 41 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays The x axis represents the OFDM
267. ware evaluates those limits instead of the prede fined ones For more information see chapter 7 3 Importing and Exporting Limits on page 124 User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 32 Numerical Results EVM PDSCH QPSK Shows the EVM for all QPSK modulated resource elements of the PDSCH channel in the analyzed frame FETCh SUMMary EVM DSQP AVERage on page 153 EVM PDSCH 16QAM Shows the EVM for all 16QAM modulated resource elements of the PDSCH channel in the analyzed frame FETCh SUMMary EVM DSST AVERage on page 153 EVM PDSCH 64QAM Shows the EVM for all 64QAM modulated resource elements of the PDSCH channel in the analyzed frame FETCh SUMMary EVM DSSF AVERage on page 153 By default all EVM results are in 96 To view the EVM results in dB change the EVM Unit The second part of the table shows results that refer to a specifc selection of the frame The statistic is always evaluated over the subframes The header row of the table contains information about the selection you have made like the subframe EVM All Shows the EVM for all resource elements in the analyzed frame FETCh SUMMary EVM ALL AVERage on page 152 EVM Phys Channel Shows the EVM for all physical channel resource elements in the analyzed frame A physical channel corresponds to a set of resource elements carrying infor mation from higher layers PDSCH PBCH or PDCCH for example are physi cal channels For more information see 3GPP 36 21
268. wer of the secondary synchronization signal S SYNC relative to the reference signal Remote command CONFigure LTE DL SYNC SPOWer on page 214 Configuring the Reference Signal The reference signal settings contain settings to describe the physical attributes and structure of the reference signal The reference signal settings are part of the Downlink Advanced Signal Characteris tics tab of the Demodulation Settings dialog box Downlink Demodulation Settings Downlink Signal Characteristics Downlink Advanced Signal Characteristics M Reference Signal Settings Rel Power 0 000 dB Pseudo Rand Seq D prs Internal Rel Power Reference Sigiial 5 2 2 onn degen 106 Rel Power Reference Signal Defines the relative power of the reference signal compared to all the other physical signals and physical channels Note that this setting gives you an offset to all other relative power settings Remote command CONFigure LTE DL REFSig POWer on page 215 Configuring Positioning Reference Signals The positioning reference signal settings contain settings to describe the physical attributes and structure of the positioning reference signal Defining Advanced Signal Characteristics Positioning reference signals are used to estimate the position of the user equipment Resource elements used by positioning reference signals are shown in blue color in the Allocation ID versus Symbol X Carr
269. ws the quality of the measured signal by comparing the power values in the frequency range near the carrier against a spec tral mask that is defined by the 3GPP specifications In this way you can test the per formance of the DUT and identify the emissions and their distance to the limit In the diagram the SEM is represented by a red line If any measured power levels are above that limit line the test fails If all power levels are inside the specified limits the test is passed The software labels the limit line to indicate whether the limit check has passed or failed The x axis represents the frequency with a frequency span that relates to the specified EUTRA LTE channel bandwidths On the y axis the power is plotted in dBm The result display also contains some numerical results for the SEM measurement for example the total signal power or the limit check result User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 45 R amp S FS K100 102 104PC Measurements and Result Displays Spectrum Emission Mask Limit Check Category Cat Detector his p jeunes m sl d 40 Mr tay pira ei bai dup A Nn if N Ae 1 990 995 1005 1010 1015 A table above the result display contains the numerical values for the limit check at each check point e Start Stop Freq Rel Shows the start and stop frequency of each section of the Spectrum Mask relative to the center frequency e RBW Shows the resolution bandwidth of each section of the Spectrum M
270. y The R amp S FSV R opens a dialog box that contains information about the LAN con nection Q gt Current Network Parameters DHCP Mode Actual DHCP Network Settings 10 114 11 36 current IP Address assigned by DHCP 255 255 0 0 current Subnet Mask assigned by DHCP Cancel 2 3 2 3 Figuring Out the Address of an R amp S FSW Follow these steps to figure out the GPIB or IP address of an R amp S FSW Figuring Out the GPIB address 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Press the Network Remote softkey The R amp S FSW opens the Network amp Remote dialog box 3 Select the GPIB tab The R amp S FSW shows information about the GPIB connection including the GPIB address Network GPIB Compatibility LXI GPIB Address 20 Figuring Out the IP address 1 Press the SETUP key 2 Press the Network Remote softkey The R amp S FSW opens the Network amp Remote dialog box and shows its current IP address in the corresponding field Application Overview Network GPIB Compatibility LXI oleic eles MU717180 IP Address 10 113 11 154 2 3 2 4 Figuring Out the Address of an R amp S RTO Follow these steps to figure out the network address of an R amp S RTO gt Press the SETUP key The R amp S RTO opens a dialog box that contains general information about the sys tem Screen SW Options HW Options Remote Settings LXI Setup x Instrument firmware versions System configuration Firmware version Com
271. y GIMBalance MAXimum RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMary GIMBalance AVERage RESult This command queries the result of the gain imbalance limit check Return values lt LimitCheck gt The type of limit average or maximum that is queried depends on the last syntax element FAILED Limit check has failed PASSED Limit check has passed NOTEVALUATED Limits have not been evaluated Example CALC LIM SUMM GIMB RES Queries the limit check Usage Query only CALCulate n LIMit k SUMMary IQOFfset MAXimum RESult CALCulate n LIMit k SUMMary IQOFfset AVERage RESuIt This command queries the result of the UO offset limit check Return values lt LimitCheck gt The type of limit average or maximum that is queried depends on the last syntax element FAILED Limit check has failed PASSED Limit check has passed NOTEVALUATED Limits have not been evaluated Example CALC LIM SUMM IQOF MAX RES Queries the limit check Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMary QUADerror MAXimum RESult CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt SUMMary QUADerror AVERage RESult This command queries the result of the quadrature error limit check Remote Commands to Configure General Settings Return values lt LimitCheck gt The type of limit average or maximum that is queried depends on the last syntax element FAILED Limit check has failed PASSED Limit check has passed NOTEVAL
272. y based on the calibration data 8 6 Performing Time Alignment Measurements The measurement software allows you to perform Time Alignment measurements between different antennas You can perform this measurement in 2 or 4 Tx antenna MIMO setups The result of the measurement is the Time Alignment Error The Time Alignment Error is the time offset between a reference antenna for example antenna 1 and another antenna The Time Alignment Error results are summarized in the corresponding result display A schematic description of the results is provided in figure 8 7 Performing Time Alignment Measurements Tx Antenna 1 Reference Time Tx Antenna 2 Time Alignment Error 42 1 Time Tx Antenna 2 Time Alignment Error 43 1 LTE Frame Start Indicator Time Tx Antenna 2 Time Alignment Error A4 1 Time Fig 8 7 Time Alignment Error 4 Tx antennas Test setup Successful Time Alignment measurements require a correct test setup A typical hardware test setup is shown in figure 8 8 Note that the dashed connection are only required for MIMO measurements on 4 Tx antennas Fig 8 8 Hardware setup For best measurement result accuracy it is recommended to use cables of the same length and identical combiners as adders In the software make sure to correctly apply the following settings e Select a reference antenna in the MIMO Configuration dialog box not All e set the Subframe Selecti
273. y group that has been detected Return values lt CidGroup gt The command returns 1 if no valid result has been detected yet Range 0 to 167 Example FETC PLC CIDG Returns the current cell identity group Usage Query only 9 8 2 3 Remote Command to Configure the Demodulation FETCh CC lt cci gt PLC PLID This command queries the cell identity that has been detected Return values lt Identity gt The command returns 1 if no valid result has been detected yet Range 0 to 2 Example FETC PLC PLID Returns the current cell identity Usage Query only Configuring MIMO Setups CONFigure ETEEFDLECO sccE EMIMO ASEEGGIOR act ae Geel eid aene 208 CONFigure L TEEDL CC cci MIMO CONFIO niiina ter taeda aad ees 208 CONFigure LTE DL CC lt cci gt MIMO ASELection Antenna This command selects the antenna for measurements with MIMO setups In case of Time Alignment measurements the command selects the reference antenna Parameters Antenna ANT1 ANT2 ANT3 ANT4 Select a single antenna to be analyzed ALL Select all antennas to be analyzed AUT1 AUT2 AUTA Automatically selects the antenna s to be analyzed AUT tests a single antenna AUT2 tests two antennas AUT4 tests four antennas Available if the number of input channels is taken From Antenna Selection AUTO Automatically selects the antenna s to be analyzed RST ANT1 CONFigure LTE DL CC lt c
274. ymbol frame word Index Bit Stream D gt BC 1 1 0 01 01 OO 02 O 01 o2 O1 O2 01 OO O3 OO O2 02 0 BC 1 1 6 2 03 r K 3 03 01 01 0 BC 1 1 32 3 3 01 03 OO O3 00 D 3 00 03 02 TRAC DATA TRACE1 would return 0 12 0 2 0 Ol O1 00 02 03 00 O1 02 O1 02 Ol continues like this until the next data block starts or the end of data is reached 0 12 0 2 32 03 02 03 03 03 03 01 03 00 O3 9 6 1 6 Capture Buffer For the Capture Buffer result display the command returns one value for each UO sample in the capture buffer absolute power The unit is always dBm The following parameters are supported e TRACE1 9 6 1 7 CCDF For the CCDF result display the type of return values depends on the parameter e TRACE1 Returns the probability values y axis lt of values probability The unit is always 96 The first value that is returned is the number of the following values e TRACE2 Returns the corresponding power levels x axis lt of values relative power The unit is always dB The first value that is returned is the number of the following values 9 6 1 8 Cell RS Weights Phase Difference For the Cell RS Weights Magnitude and Cell RS Weights Magnitude Difference result display the command returns one value for each subcarrier that has been analyzed lt Phase gt User Manual 1308 9029 42 17 162 9 6 1 9 Remote Commands to Read Trace Data
275. yzer Using the smartcard reader dongle Before you can use the software you have to load the license s on a smartcard if you already have one or order a new smartcard R amp S FSPC New license types are avail able as registered licenses see below Licensing the Software You can use the smart card together with the USB smart card reader for SIM format supplied with the software Alternatively you can insert the smart card full format in a reader that is connected to or built into your PC Note that support for problems with the smart card licensing can only be guaranteed if the supplied USB smart card reader for SIM format is used 1 With the delivery of the R amp S FSPC you got a smart card and a smart card reader 5 aP 2 Remove the smart card 3 3 Insert the smart card into the reader If the OMNIKEY label faces upward the smart card has to be inserted with the chip facedown and the angled corner facing away from the reader Se 4 After pushing the smart card completely inside the USB smart card reader you can use it together with the software e When you insert the USB Smartcard reader into the PC the drivers will be loaded If your PC does not already have drivers installed for this reader the hardware will not be detected and the software will not work In this case install the required driver manually On the CD it is in the folder Install USB SmartCard Reader Driver Fil
276. z LUlMitzks OObowerTRANsient eene nene nn nnns 176 CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ACHannel RESult Result This command queries the limit check results for the adjacent channels during ACLR measurements Remote Commands to Read Trace Data Query parameters lt Result gt ALL Queries the overall limit check results REL Queries the channel power limit check results ABS Queries the distance to the limit line Return values lt LimitCheck gt Returns two values one for the upper and one for the lower adjacent channel PASSED Limit check has passed FAILED Limit check has failed Example CALC LIM ACP ACH RES ALL Queries the results of the adjacent channel limit check Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt LIMit lt k gt ACPower ALTernate RESult lt Result gt This command queries the limit check results for the alternate channels during ACLR measurements Query parameters lt Result gt ALL Queries the overall limit check results REL Queries the channel power limit check results ABS Queries the distance to the limit line Return values lt LimitCheck gt Returns two values one for the upper and one for the lower alternate channel PASSED Limit check has passed FAILED Limit check has failed Example CALC LIM ACP ALT RES ALL Queries the results of the alternate channel limit check Usage Query only Remote Commands to Read Trace Data CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt

R&S®FS-K10x(PC) LTE Measurement Software

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S&reg;FS-K10x(PC) LTE Measurement Software

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S®FS-K10x(PC) LTE Measurement Software